JP6845770B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of performing a game using a game medium.

As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area (also referred to as "starting prize"), it is predetermined. Some prize balls are paid out to the player. Further, a variable display device capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as "variable") the identification information when the game medium wins a prize in a specific winning area (also referred to as "starting area") is provided, and the variable display device can be used for identification. Depending on the display result of the variable display of information, the one configured to be controllable to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player or a predetermined state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. is there.

The advantageous state means a state that is advantageous to the player who has been given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the state of the special variable winning means is advantageous to the player in which the game medium is likely to win a prize (big hit game state), or a state in which the right to become advantageous to the player is generated. , A state in which a predetermined game value is given, such as a state in which the conditions for paying out the prize game medium are easily satisfied. Further, the predetermined state is a state that is advantageous to the player as in the advantageous state, but is a state in which the degree of profit is relatively lower than that of the advantageous state (small hit game state).

In such a game machine, the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as the identification information is ".
When the display mode (big hit symbol) indicating "big hit" is reached, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to an advantageous state (big hit game state) in which the game medium is easy to win, and in each opening period, a predetermined number (for example, The big prize opening is closed when there is a prize in the big winning opening (10 pieces) or when a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses. Further, when the display result of the variable display device becomes a display mode (small hit symbol) indicating "small hit", for example, an advantageous state in which the large winning opening is opened once and the game medium can win a prize (small hit game state). When a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses, the big winning opening is closed.

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine, the first identification information is variably displayed when the game medium wins in the first start area, and the second identification information is variably displayed when the game medium wins in the second start area. Display and
There are some that can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (also referred to as "simultaneously variable"). Further, in such a game machine, when the variable display of the first identification information cannot be started, the information regarding the variable display of the first identification information is stored as the first hold storage, and the variable display of the second identification information is performed. If it cannot be started, the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information can be stored as the second hold storage. Then, in this game machine capable of simultaneous fluctuation, by providing a special state in which a time shorter than the normal state is set as the variable display time (variation time) of the second identification information, a predetermined state (small hit) is provided in the special state. Some are configured so that the frequency of being controlled by the game state (for example, the frequency of small hits per unit time) is high. For example, Patent Documents 1 and 2 describe a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).
In the high probability state (special state) of, by setting the fluctuation time of the second identification information shorter than in the normal state (low probability state), it is possible to control in a state where the frequency of small hits is higher than in the normal state. It is stated that there is.

JP-A-2017-86643 (paragraphs 0128, 0234, 0237, 0512) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-20287 (paragraph 0009, 0308-0311)

By the way, in Patent Documents 1 and 2 that can be controlled in the special state as described above, the fluctuation time of the second identification information is set to be relatively long in the normal state. Specifically, in Patent Document 1, it is set to 180 seconds to 300 seconds, and in Patent Document 2, it is set to 10 hours. As described above, in the gaming machine having a long fluctuation time of the second identification information in the normal state as described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (second hold display) in the normal state. Also called.)
Is not appropriate to be visible.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing appropriate display control for the second hold display in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can variably display identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a first identification information (for example, a first identification information). Execution of steps S26A and S26B in the variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) capable of executing the variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. Steps S358 to S360 in a predetermined state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. By selecting a partial), a normal state (for example, a non-KT state), and a shorter fluctuation time at a higher rate as the execution time for the variable display of the second identification information than in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 13). Execution of state control means (for example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state. (Part), the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the first reserved storage, and the information related to the variable display of the second identification information. 2. A second hold storage means that can be stored as hold storage (for example, a second hold storage buffer) and a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (for example, a first hold display in the first hold display unit 61). , The second hold display means (for example, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62) that can display the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage (for example, step S707 in the effect control microcomputer 200) is executed. Part), an effect control means capable of executing variable display of the effect symbol, and a corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display different from the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed, and the effect control means is usually provided. In the state, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the first identification information, and in the special state, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the second identification information. , The variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the second identification information while executing the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state, and the hold display means can execute the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state (for example, non-KT). In the state), the first hold display can be displayed. However, the second hold display cannot be displayed (for example, step S7075 is executed when it is Y in step S7073, and steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed when it is N in step S7077), and in a special state. , The second hold display can be displayed, and the second hold display can be made difficult to see in a specific period after the specific timing before the end of the special state. It is possible to execute the hold display change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display, and during a predetermined period including the specific period, the hold display change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display is executed. In the normal state, the corresponding display means does not display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, and the start condition for the variable display of the second identification information in the movement path of the game medium is satisfied. It is characterized in that a promotion display for urging the launch of the game medium toward a specific path through which the game medium can pass can be displayed in the special state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory in the normal state, and it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. ..
(Means 1) Another gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can variably display identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a first identification information (for example, a jackpot state). , 1st special symbol) variable display and 2nd identification information (for example, 2nd special symbol) variable display can be executed in parallel. Steps S26A, S26B in the game control microcomputer 560. A predetermined state control means (for example, steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state. (For example, a non-KT state) and a shorter fluctuation time are selected at a higher rate as the execution time for the variable display of the second identification information than the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 13). ), A state control means (for example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state. (Part for executing S2214B), the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the first reserved storage, and the variable display of the second identification information. A second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information as a second hold storage, and a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (for example, a first hold in the first hold display unit 61). (Display) and the second hold display means (for example, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62) corresponding to the second hold storage can be displayed (for example, step S707 in the effect control microcomputer 200). The hold display means can display the first hold display in the normal state (for example, the non-KT state), but cannot display the second hold display (for example, the step). Step S7075 is executed when it is Y of S7073, and steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed when it is N of step S7077). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory in the normal state, and it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. ..

(Means 2) When the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed in the means 1, the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (for example, the second in the second specific display unit 62a) is performed. Specific display means capable of displaying specific display (for example, effect control microcomputer 2)
A portion for executing steps S9308 and S9310 in 00) is further provided, and the hold display means can display the second hold display in a period other than the above-mentioned specific period (for example, a period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time). At the same time, the specific display means can display the specific display, and during the specific period, the hold display means can make the second hold display difficult to see ().
For example, it is possible to make the specific display difficult to see (for example, step S9310 is not executed when it is Y in step S9309) together with step S7082 not executing when it is Y in step S7081. , May be a feature. According to such a configuration, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

(Means 3) In the means 2, the predetermining means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition is performed in step S.
The specific determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an advantageous state is obtained based on the second hold storage) before the determination of the predetermination means and the portion for executing 65A and S65B (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is in step S312). , S215, S216, S322) and
The first aspect, wherein the hold display means changes the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory, which is the determination target of the specific determination means, to the first special aspect according to the determination result of the specific determination means. A change effect (for example, a hold notice) can be executed, and the specific display means sets a specific display corresponding to the second identification information to be determined by the prior determination means according to the determination result of the prior determination means. 2 The second mode change effect (for example, specific notice) that changes to a special mode can be executed, and in a predetermined period including a specific period (for example, a period in which the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time)
The hold display means restricts the execution of the first aspect change effect (for example, step S7079 is not executed when Y in step S7078), and the specific display means restricts the execution of the second aspect change effect (for example, step S7078). Step S9307 is not executed when it is Y in S9306). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect in a specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to see.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to the means 3, the state control means is set as a special state.
It may be characterized in that it can be controlled into a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. .. According to such a configuration, the monotonousness of playability in a special state can be eliminated.
It is possible to improve the interest of the game when controlling it to a special state.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to the means 4, the effect symbols (for example, the background symbols in the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a) are variable in response to the variable display of the identification information. Display and reduced symbol smaller than the effect symbol (for example, first small symbol display unit 91b)
And the effect control means (for example, S920D, S920E, S92 in the effect control microcomputer 200) that can execute the variable display of the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b).
The effect control means includes an effect pattern (for example, a portion that executes 0H, S920I, S920K), and the effect control means corresponds to a variable display of the first identification information (for example, a first background symbol display unit) in a normal state (for example, a non-KT state). The variable display of the background symbol in 91a) is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a) is not executed (for example, step S920C). Step S920E is executed when the value is Y, and step S920J is executed when the value is N in step S920G), special state (
For example, in the KT state), the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is not executed (for example, step S920G). Step S920I is executed when the value is Y, and step S920F is executed when the value is N in step S920C). A reduced symbol corresponding to the variable display of any of the identification information (for example, a small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second small symbol display unit 92b).
(For example, either step S920D or S920H is executed depending on whether it is in the non-KT state or the KT state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol, and it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the second identification information to the variable display by the player in the normal state.

(Means 6) In any of means 1 to 5, the hold display means displays a second hold in a specific period including the timing when the special state ends (for example, a period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time). Can be made difficult to see (see, for example, FIG. 64).
It may be characterized in that. According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display.

(Means 7) In the means 6, the hold display means displays the first hold storage number corresponding to the number of the first hold storage (for example, the first hold storage number display) regardless of whether the hold display means is controlled in the normal state or the special state.
The hold storage number display 71) is displayed, and the second hold number display corresponding to the number of the second hold storage is not displayed (for example, when the time is Y in step S7071, step S7072 is executed, and it is Y in step S7076. Even in this case, the process corresponding to step S7072 is not executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the number of the second reserved memories while ensuring the player's recognizability with respect to the number of the first reserved memories, and the first reserved memory and the first (2) Appropriate display control can be realized for each of the reserved storage numbers.

(Means 8) In any of means 1 to means 7, the game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided on a predetermined path (for example, to the right of the game area 7) among the flow paths to which the game medium (for example, a game ball) flows down, and the game medium can pass through. After the specific area (for example, the operating gate 17) and the predetermined condition (for example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) are satisfied, an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area. ) Is controllable (for example, step S30 in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560).
5 to S307, S355 to S357) and a predetermined promotion notification (for example, a first instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions are executed. A promotion notification means (for example, a second instruction notification) capable of executing a specific promotion notification (for example, a second instruction notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium into the specific area after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. Step S4404 in the effect control microcomputer 200
, S4405, S4604, S4605), and may be further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the external output signal output by a game machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the external output signal output by a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal design normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric accessory operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which a microcomputer for production control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a confirmation command. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the instruction notification control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is a timing chart when the jackpot game state ends and is controlled to the 1st KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the hold storage display control processing in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the specific display control processing in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen layout in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display control such as the 2nd hold display in a modification.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 shows a pachinko game machine (ball game machine) 1
It is a front view seen from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame consists of a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, and a mechanical plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached.
It is a structure including (not shown) and various parts (excluding the game board 6 described later) attached to them.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape.
On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the hit game ball (hit ball) can flow down.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). A display area (hereinafter referred to as a first variable display unit 9a) for variably displaying a decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying a display result, and a second start condition, which is a second execution condition, are satisfied. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as a second variable display unit 9b) and a display area (hereinafter, a background symbol) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents than the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b. There is a display unit 9c). It should be noted that the fact that the display contents are easy to visually recognize means, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display contents in the variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. In addition, a prize means that a game ball has entered an area that is predetermined as a prize area such as a prize opening. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 9a and second variable display unit 9b), and the background symbol effect unit 9c has 2 Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed in the two variable display units is executed, whether the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. It is difficult to grasp (whether or not). In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the symbol variation display for the effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a is referred to as the first identification information.
It is called a special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize.
Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a is displayed during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a.
Variable display of decorative patterns as decorative (directing) patterns. In addition, the second variable display unit 9b
Performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of the decorative symbol are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative pattern and the type of the second decorative pattern are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9).
It may be, or it may be of a different type. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storages. Area for displaying the total number (total number of pending storages), which is the total of and (hereinafter, symbol pending storage display unit 18c)
That is. ). As described above, in this embodiment, the total number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see the total. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, respectively. Although it is configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, an indicator of another aspect may be used. As an example, if the first special symbol hold storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b are each composed of one display, the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. Let me do it.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of total pending storage that can be displayed, that is, the total number of pending storage is 8.
Is. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, the symbol hold storage display unit 18
Of the eight display areas in c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 13 when the number of first reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, the second
When the game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 when the number of reserved memories is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the number of second reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8.
Those values are examples. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, an operating gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the operating gate 17 is the operating gate switch 1.
Detected by 7a.

Below the operating gate 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 are provided.
As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) in which the game ball can win in the special winning opening 24 and the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forward in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 24, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display 10. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 14 which is the winning area is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 1
The special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger than that of 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 7 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, the second start winning opening 1
If 4 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 24. Further, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and falls toward the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged.
And the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 is specially variable. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the winning ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided in.

A switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 24 is provided in the special winning opening 24. 2nd count switch 25a
When a game ball is detected by, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) through the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins in the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the special winning opening 24 to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, an S switch 14a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 14 is provided in the second starting winning opening 14. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, and the special variable winning ball device 20 (
Large winning opening), variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), and special variable winning ball device 2
Since 2 (special winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 and launches the game during a big hit game or in the KT state described later. (So-called right-handed operation) is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time required from the game ball passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is set to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, Gate 3
It is adjusted by the installation position of 2 and the variable winning ball device 32, and a group of nails forming a flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the gate 32, and the first K described later will be described.
In the T state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the variable winning ball is changed after the game ball passes through the gate 32. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required to reach the ball device 15, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state. In this case, the one game ball can win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 1
The variable display of the display of 0 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 4 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32.
1 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 lights up.
Is increased by 1. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the LED that lights up
Is reduced by 1.

Decorative lamps 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. Top frame lamps 28a, left frame lamps 28b, and right frame lamps 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 7. Further, the prize ball lamp 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b.
Is provided, and in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c, a bulb burnout lamp 5 that lights up when the supply bulb runs out.
2 is provided.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 5, 0.6
A game ball is launched every second. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the variable display unit 9a. It will be started. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a,
If the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends and the second start condition is satisfied), the second special symbol display unit 8b displays the second. The variable display (variation) of the special symbol is started, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started in the second variable display unit 9b. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit,
If the total number of reserved storage has not reached the upper limit, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c is incremented by 1.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is,
The special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls win the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or when a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, it should be noted.
A V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and a continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is 2
There are R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variable jackpot. If a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 2-round jackpot game state is given, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Has a low probability of being the next big hit (low probability / non-KT state and low probability described later /
It becomes an advantageous state for the player, which is a higher probability change state (a high probability state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than a low probability state) higher than the first KT state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, the first symbol on the first special symbol display 8a
Not only does the probability that the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increase, but the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol also increases. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start winning prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second starting winning prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Has a low probability of being the next big hit (low probability / non-KT state and low probability described later /
It becomes an advantageous state for the player, which is a higher probability change state (a high probability state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than a low probability state) higher than the first KT state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, the second special symbol display 8b has a second.
Not only does the probability that the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increase, but the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a jackpot symbol also increases. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second starting prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8
The probability that the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed in b becomes a big hit symbol (specific display result:, for example, an odd number among 0 to 9) is higher than in the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state has a low probability state and a non-K state.
When controlled to the T state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state), and when the probability is low and the first KT
When controlled to a state (low probability / first KT state), when controlled to a high probability and first KT state (high probability / first KT state), and when controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability / first KT state). 2K
It may be controlled to (T state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit Even if the above occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Also, the second of the KT states
In the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is likely to win the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side.

The probabilistic state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is changed to a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability is low / 1K
When the state shifts to the T state and then the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without a big hit,
The first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first until the next jackpot occurs.
The KT state is maintained. Also, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability is high / the second
It shifts to the KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly terminated when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, but the present embodiment is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, when the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the second start winning opening 1 is mainly used.
A start-up prize for 4 is generated, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later). That is, even though it is in the normal state, it is hit right and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. In such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, by imposing a penalty by shifting only to the first KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are synchronized with each other. Here, "synchronization" means that the start time point and the end time point of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example
The background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. And
Although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c. (The background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle and right sides aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the first
When the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol ends and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Will be done. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time,
Specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, the background symbol is displayed when the special symbol whose variable display ends later is stopped and displayed. The variable display ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 9c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned).

In addition, during reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 9c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. In addition, about this embodiment,
Although the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, the structure of the variable winning ball device 15 is also a special variable winning ball device, although the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 22. The structure is the same as that of the ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. Base plate 1
In the substantially central region of 01, a special winning opening 24 (the second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens toward the front is formed, and from the special winning opening 24 in the base plate portion 101. At the upper position, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back surface side (rear side) of the game area 7 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward. .. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right side of the base plate portion 101.

The bottom member 23 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodating hole 102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom member 23 can be moved forward and backward between the state of being moved forward as shown in FIG. 3 and the state of being moved backward as shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom member 23 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 112. The upstream region 23U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 23 in the state of being in the state, and the upstream flow path portion 113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path of the game ball together with the bottom member 23. Bottom member 2
A downstream region 23L, which is a lower end portion (left end portion) of No. 3, is connected to the bottom surface member 23 in the longitudinal direction, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, which forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom surface member 23, is formed.

Further, on the upper part of the flow path forming base portion 112, the upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114
Guidance to guide the game ball that has fallen below the bottom member 23 to the special winning opening 24 by denting downward from the end of the bottom member 23 side and surrounding the special winning opening 24 from the left and right and from below in front view. The flow path portion 115 is formed.

The upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115 is a special winning opening 2
It extends downward to the left toward the 4th side and is dented in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 112. Has been done. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow paths portions bounces toward the glass door frame 4. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 22, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, which is composed of an upstream side flow path portion 113, a bottom surface member 23, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 118 for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F are formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the regulation piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. The regulation piece 118 is 1 in the part that covers 114 from the front.
Is formed. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom surface member 23, a total of five regulation pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball device 22 (and the variable winning ball device 15 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 1) in which the bottom surface member 23 is moved backward is
When 5) is open, the game ball P can fall into the guide flow path portion 115 of the flow path forming base portion 112, and flows down the guide flow path portion 115 to flow down the special winning opening 24 (5). Or the second
It is possible to win a prize in the starting winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. In addition, the I / O port unit 57
May be external.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputer mounted on a substrate other than the main substrate 31.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and the solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20.
A solenoid 106 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 22 and an output circuit 59 that drives the solenoid 206 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 are also mounted on the main board 31 and when the power is turned on. A system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 560, and an information output circuit that outputs information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot game state to an external device such as a hall computer. (Not shown) is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, on the main board 31,
A test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the game machine is also provided.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the effect control board 80 may be provided only for the effect control without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). Input driver 202 and input port 20 according to the effect control INT signal)
The effect control command is received via 3. Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit
For example, diodes and transistors are used. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 24a is contained in the special variable winning ball device 22.
Is provided, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping.
The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 209 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 is the effect control board 8.
It is installed in 0. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. And VDP209
Outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and other effect devices (lamps,
Two boards may be provided with a second effect control board on which a circuit for controlling the LED, the speaker 27, etc.) is mounted. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. 6). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) determines whether the content of the program is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1).
Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). And initialization of the built-in device (
Initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), is performed (step S4). The interrupt mode 2 is C.
The address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the PU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is the mode indicating the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. Step S
By the processing of 91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are for the part of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10).
Note that the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Also, ROM 54
Set the start address of the initialization table stored in (step S) to the pointer.
11), the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, etc. are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 in the pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 performs the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S) in the main process.
18) is repeatedly executed. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.
Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the big hit determination random number generation counter, etc. The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, whether or not a power cutoff signal is output (
A power failure detection process for detecting (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a voltage drop of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power failure detection process, the CPU
56 detects that a power failure signal has been output, and backs up the necessary data in the RAM.
Executes the power supply stop processing for saving in the area. Next, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the first count switch 2 are passed through the input driver circuit 58.
The detection signals of 3a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operating gate switch 17a are input, and their states are determined (switch processing: step S21).
..

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b. Execute (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23).
The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: step S).
24, S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit judgment)
(2) Random 2: Determine which type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5: Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the initial value of random 1)
(6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4).
), The counter for generating a random number for determining the hit of a normal symbol is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random number 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. You may.

Further, the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process (step S26A). 1st
In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process process, the second special symbol display 8b is used according to the game state.
A second for controlling the special variable winning ball device 20, the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order.
Executes the corresponding process according to the special symbol process flag. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. And the CPU 56
Normal symbol process processing is performed (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs the hold storage process (step S27a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 informs the output port of the contents related to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S31: output processing)
..

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S32). CPU 56
For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, but the CPU 5
6 controls the two indicators so that a big hit does not occur at the same time.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot judgment table is ROM
It is a set of data stored in 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot judgment table shows a low probability state (low probability / non-KT).
Non-probability big hit judgment table used in the state, low probability / first KT state) and probabilistic big hit judgment table used in the probabilistic state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state)) There is. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 10 is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 10 is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. .. The numerical value shown in FIG. 10 is the jackpot determination value.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). The big hit determination random number value is any one shown in FIG. If it matches the jackpot judgment value, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10 indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. In addition, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, all the hits are unconditionally made a small hit (however, as will be described later, it is a forced loss after the fact. In some cases).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R" based on a random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. "Probability change jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot"
, Or a table referenced to determine either "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 20%, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. In addition, FIG. 11 (
As shown in B), in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed,
30% probability of "16R probability variation jackpot", 30% probability of "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability of "2R probability variation jackpot", 35% probability of "2R normal" It is decided as a big hit.

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability / second KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment,
It shifts to the probabilistic state and also shifts to the second KT state. Step S220 described later
7A, S2208A, S2207B, S2210B). Then, the probability variation state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, it is not the second KT state even if it becomes the "16R probability variation big hit". It may shift to the first KT state (steps S2208B and S2209B described later).
reference).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. Step S2210A described later.
, S2211A, S2212B, S2213B). Then, the probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (step S2212A described later).
reference). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (steps S2213A, S2010-S).
See 2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, it shifts to the probability variation state). At the same time, it shifts to the first KT state. Step S2212B described later.
, S2213B). Then, the probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (step S2214B described later).
reference). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends (steps S2215B, S2010-S).
See 2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be configured to be determinable. Be done.

12 to 14 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. Eighteen types from # 01 to # 18 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the fluctuation pattern #n (n)
= 01 to 07 or 01 to 18) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 12 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability /
In the case of the first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown in FIG. 12B is selected and the variation pattern is determined. FIG. 12 (
As shown in B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 13 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 02. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variation display is reduced. By making it, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize ball is aimed at by a small hit even in a non-KT state.
In this embodiment, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special prize opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. in this case,
When executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 13 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. .. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 03 to # 04. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit. pattern#
It is determined to be 03 (variation pattern for preparation for opening the second start winning opening). In this embodiment,
As described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, the special variable winning ball device 2 is actually used.
The special winning opening 24 in 2 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 2
There is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of 2, and if the special variable winning ball device 22 is immediately controlled to the open state, a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. There is a possibility of doing it. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 13
The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in (E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (E), low probability / first
When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th variation of the KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 05 to # 07 and # 30. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (E), when a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 05 of the shortened fluctuation. Alternatively, the second fluctuation pattern # 030 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second, may be determined. The second variation pattern # 05 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 30 can be selected only when one or more second hold memories are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. In this embodiment, a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, and the second
When the variation display is executed based on the variation pattern # 06, in the variation display of the background symbol in the effect display device 9, a pattern fanning effect such as reaching or sliding effect is executed.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 08 to # 09. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when a small hit is determined as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays a character such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 08 is determined to be accompanied by. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (F), low probability / first
When a big hit is determined as the 100th fluctuation of the KT state, a second display with a predetermined revival display is performed after the end display in which characters such as "chance time is over !!" are displayed on the effect display device 9.
The fluctuation pattern # 09 is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. for that reason,
In this embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is configured to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. ing.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, even when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first configuration). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. in this case,
When executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 14 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. .. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second fluctuation patterns # 10 to # 12. Will be done.

As in the case of the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the second start prize is also obtained when the small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state. The variation pattern for preparing to open the mouth (second variation pattern # 10) may be determined. In addition, FIG. 14 (G
), When it is determined that the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation including a battle effect for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends. Pattern # 12 is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), 1 in the high probability / first KT state.
Even when the small hit is determined as the variation item, the second variation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 14 (
The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations shown in H) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), high probability / first KT
When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation of the state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 13, # 15, and # 31.

As shown in FIG. 14 (H), as in the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state,
When it is determined that a small hit is made after the second fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second The second fluctuation pattern # 031 may be determined. The second fluctuation pattern # 13 is a fluctuation pattern that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second fluctuation pattern # 3
1 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when one or more second reserved storages are stored.
As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 15 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the second fluctuation pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state. ..

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / second KT state, FIG.
The variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in 4 (I) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 16 to # 18.

As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the shortening fluctuation occurs in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 16 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the fluctuation display is executed, may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), high probability /
When determining a small hit in the second KT state, it may be determined in the second fluctuation pattern # 17 including a continuous effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when a variable pattern including a continuous effect or a battle effect is determined, the effect display device 9 executes the continuous effect or the battle effect in the variable display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15 (1)
Shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state. Is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (1). As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be off, the normal symbol display 10
The out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol and the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is 0.
While it is as short as 8 seconds, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. 0.2
After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. The symbol fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time is 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening is 0.
After 0.5 seconds, which is the total of 1 second, has passed, and the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is about 0.6 seconds. Has been done. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is longer.
Since the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is already in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 when it is controlled by. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 15.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (2). As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be off, the normal symbol display 10 is used.
The out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol and the missed symbol is 0.2 second. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is short.
Is longer, so that the game ball can easily enter the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side as compared with the first KT state, and the game ball can easily win the special winning opening 24.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. Symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds, symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and second start winning opening pre-opening processing time 2.
It is configured so that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is about 0.6 seconds after the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the total of 6 seconds. Has been done. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is longer.
Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 before being controlled. Therefore, the 2nd K
In the T state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 15.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 15 is performed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU).
It is performed by executing the normal symbol process process (see step S26C) according to 56). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S26C, depending on whether it is in the KT state or the normal state. Different probabilities (for example, 1 in the KT state)
It is determined by 0/11, or 1/11) in the normal state, whether or not to hit the normal drawing. In addition, it should be noted.
The same probability (for example, regardless of whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or a jackpot gaming state). 10% or 100%) may be used to determine whether or not to make a normal figure.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is made different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be made different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the second after closing the variable winning ball device 15.
The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is configured so that the time after the start winning opening processing is controllable and the time after the second starting winning opening opening processing is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. May be configured to be different. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to shorten the closing period (interval period) in the first KT state by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning is as shown in FIG. 15 (1). A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 15 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). In other words
The special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and may be controlled so as not to set the special flag in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, low probability / 1st KT
Of the 100 times of shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 15 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 15, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. In, it is possible not to win the variable winning ball device 15, and the probability is low / non-KT
It is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during the state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24
Will be able to win a prize). On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. In the example shown in FIG. 16, command 8000
(H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) are decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start.
Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 200 has commands 8000 (H) to 8007.
Upon receiving any of (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H), the first variable display unit 9a
Alternatively, the second variable display unit 9b is controlled to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. Command 9003 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command.
This is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the R probability variation jackpot. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9005 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command by 2.
This is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the R probability variation jackpot. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the effect control microcomputer 200 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send a display result specification command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Command A
001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number has not reached 4.
Is. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command D000 (H) is in the first customer waiting state (the first special symbol is not changed, and the command D000 (H) is in the first customer waiting state.
This is an effect control command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the first hold memory is not stored). Command D001 (H) is in the second customer waiting state (second).
This is an effect control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the special symbol has not been changed and the second hold memory is not stored). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (
H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first) that specifies the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state.
KT background specification command). Command E003 (H) has a high probability of playing / 2nd K
This is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background specification command) that specifies the background display in the T state.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

The CPU 56 is provided on the game board 6 when the first special symbol process process is performed.
If the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the start winning opening 13 is turned on, that is, if a start winning that the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13 has occurred (step). S311), the first start port switch passing process is executed (step S312).
.. After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S300 to S307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

First special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S303): The value of the first special symbol process flag is 3.
Is executed when. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Control is performed to send the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and step S22.
In the display control process of, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

First gate passage waiting process (step S304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example).

Pre-processing for opening the first prize opening (step S305): The value of the first special symbol process flag is 5.
Is executed when. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). In addition, although the pre-processing for opening the first prize opening is executed for each round,
When starting the first round, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also the process of starting the big hit game.

Processing during opening of the first large winning opening (step S306): The value of the first special symbol process flag is 6.
Is executed when. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins the prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the grand prize opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312.
In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and displays them.
The process of storing in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20) is executed (step S215). In the process of step S215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5) are extracted and stored in the storage area. .. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random number 5) in the first variation pattern setting process described later. You may.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, in the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 5). Will be done. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Then, further, the first effective start winning command is issued to the effect control microcomputer 200.
Is controlled to be transmitted to (step S216). The first effective start winning command includes a preliminary determination result.

FIG. 21 shows a first special symbol normal process (step S30) in the first special symbol process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 0). The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, the first
This is a case where the special symbol display 8a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol and is not in the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S52A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51A).

If the first hold storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 has a RAM 5
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of 5 is read out and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S53A), and the first reserved storage is stored. The value of the number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54A). That is, R
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of AM55 is set to the first hold storage number = n-1. Store in the corresponding storage area. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. When the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that the probability is low / the first KT state, and the probability is low / 1K.
When the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the T background specification command is determined to be in the high probability / first KT state, and the high accuracy / first KT background specification command is executed when the probability variation flag is on and the second KT. When the flag is on, it is determined that the flag is in the high probability / second KT state, and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S64AA). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68A without performing the processing after step S64A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S64AA, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65A. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S64AA, steps S64A to S161A A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (it may be a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

If the jackpot of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 560
Reads a random number for jackpot determination (random number 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S).
64A), the jackpot determination module is executed (step S65A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S67A). ..
Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on random 2 (step S160A), the jackpot type is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A. .. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S66A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S68A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although not shown,
The symbol to be stopped is confirmed immediately before step S68A.

In step S65A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 shows a first variation pattern setting process (step S) in the first special symbol process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 302). In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12A to 12B according to the game state. (Step S20
1). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is used (step S1700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and fluctuates. Start measuring the time (step S)
1702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 shows the process during the first special symbol change in the first special symbol process process (step S3).
03) is a flowchart showing. In the first special symbol change processing, the CPU 56
First, the first fluctuation time timer is subtracted by 1 (step S1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S1122A), the effect control microcomputer 200
Control is performed to send a symbol confirmation designation command to (step S1123A). And CP
The U56 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol stop process (step S304).
) Is updated (step S1124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A).
). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and controls to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1124A).

By executing the processes of steps S1125A to S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol,
The variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 9a in the first variable display unit 9a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 28, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start port switch passing process (step S32)
2) is executed, so even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol is being displayed, a new hold memory is stored when a new start prize is generated. Has been done.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S112)
5A N), the process is terminated as it is.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state is “0” (step S2010), and in “0”. If there is, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, when the probability is low / the first KT state, the CPU 56
Subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S2011), and determines whether or not the value has reached "0" (step S2012). If the value of the KT count counter does not reach "0",
The process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, the CPU 56 resets the 1st KT flag indicating the 1st KT state (1st KT flag). Step S2013), Step S2
Move to 014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S2014). If the first jackpot flag is set, C
If the PU56 is set, the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT
The count counter is reset (step S2015).

Next, the CPU 56 has a jackpot signal 1 and a jackpot signal 2 if they have not yet been output.
Control is performed to start the external output (see FIGS. 32 and 33) (step S2015X).
..

Next, the CPU 56 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". Is set (step S2019)
, Set the value of the 1st special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the process of waiting for the passage of the 1st gate (
Step S2020).

In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S2015X, with respect to the external outputs of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2, even before the game ball passes through the operating gate 17 and the jackpot game is started. , The external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is started at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.

Although the details will be described later, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area 7 can be executed. .. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, as a right-handed notification, a firing promotion notification for urging the player to launch the game ball aiming at the operating gate 17 can be executed.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or low volume). The screen display) may be configured to give a left-handed notification to the player to urge the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area 7. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a loud sound). It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by output or large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area 7 is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. Therefore, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, when the number of detected game balls at the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the second starting winning opening 14, and the special winning opening 24 reaches a certain number, a left-handed notification is performed. May be good. Further, at the gate 32 and the operating gate 17, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening 14 and the special winning opening 14 and the special winning opening In 24, when a specific number (for example, one) or more of game balls smaller than a predetermined number is detected, left-handed notification may be performed.

Further, for example, the external signal is not output when the game ball is detected at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17, while the external signal is output when the game ball is detected at the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24. It may be configured to do so.

In this embodiment, the demo is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.
If it is detected that the game ball has won the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 during the demo display in the normal state, the demo display that was being executed is executed. It may be the one that finishes and gives a left-handed notification.

In this embodiment, since the external output of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is executed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, for example, a low probability / first before the amusement store is closed.
If the hold memory of the second special symbol remains after the KT state is completed, the second special symbol may be used for a long time (in a situation where the player has finished the game due to the closing of the game store). 5
Since the jackpot symbol can be output externally when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed through the variable display of (minutes), it is possible to urge the clerk of the game store to initialize the game machine 1 between the closing of the game store and the next opening. it can.
At this time, the clerk will open the store after performing initialization (RAM clear).

In addition, not only before the amusement store is closed, but also when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed after the player leaves the seat (for example, the second hold memory generated in the KT state is digested in the normal state, and the second special There is a case where the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed after a long time (5 minutes) fluctuation display of the symbol), but even in such a case, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.
Since the external output of is executed, it is possible to urge the clerk of the game store to initialize the game machine 1.

FIG. 25 shows a process of waiting for passage through the first gate in the special symbol process process (step S304).
It is a flowchart which shows A). In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 17a has been input (step S250).
1). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56
The first big hit start designation command is transmitted (step S2502), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to the value corresponding to the first big winning opening pre-opening process (step S2503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 17 The game is configured to shift to a big hit game on condition that the game ball has passed through and detected by the operating gate switch 17a.

FIG. 26 shows the first large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process process.
) Is a flowchart showing. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the large winning opening pre-opening timer by -1 (step S1401). If it is before the start of round 1, the process of step S1401 is executed, so that the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in step S2017 of the first special symbol stop process is measured. , The jackpot display time (fanfare period) before the start of Round 1 will be measured. Further, in the case of round 1 or later, the process of step S1401 is executed, and the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in the processing during opening of the large winning opening is measured, so that after each round ( The interval period (except after the final round) will be measured.

In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer is shown, but the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separated. It may be configured to measure the time using the timer of.

Next, when the CPU 56 has timed out the timer before opening the big winning opening (the value of the time measurement timer is 0) (step S1411), the CPU 56 has EX of the designated command during opening of the big winning opening.
The current number of rounds is set in the T data, and control is performed for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1412).

Next, the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the large winning opening to be in the open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 20.

Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the starting round in the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the winning opening (step S1415).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306) (step S1416).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A).
, Control to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S2203).
A), the process is completed.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S22).
04A). Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0.
That is, it is confirmed whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 will
Check whether the type of jackpot that ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S22).
06A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot is achieved can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and at the same time, a second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A).
.. Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S2209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2210A), and at the same time, the first K
The first KT flag indicating that the T state is set is set to shift to the first KT state (step S2211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 56
The first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S2212A). Also,
The CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the low probability / first KT state (step S2213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2214A).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

The CPU 56 is provided on the game board 6 when performing the second special symbol process process.
If the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the start winning opening 14 is turned on, that is, if the start winning in which the game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred (step). S321), the second start port switch passing process is executed (step S322).
.. If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 56 is in steps S350 to S, depending on the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).
Perform any of the 360 processes.

The processes of steps S350 to S360 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol change processing (step S353): The value of the second special symbol process flag is 3.
Is executed when. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (second special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S358 (8 in this example). When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when forced to be missed), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S350 (0 in this example).
Update to. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example).
Update to.

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S355): The value of the second special symbol process flag is 5.
Is executed when. In the second large winning opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). In addition, although the pre-processing for opening the second prize opening is executed for each round,
When starting the first round, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also the process of starting the big hit game.

Processing during opening of the second large winning opening (step S356): The value of the second special symbol process flag is 6.
Is executed when. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins the prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the grand prize opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release preprocessing (step S358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 22 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting a small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 has elapsed by 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the second count switch 25a detects the game ball, the control is performed to transmit the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. And the internal state (
The second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 29 shows the second special symbol normal process (step S35) in the second special symbol process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 0). The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350 is the second.
The special symbol display 8b is in a state where the variation display of the second special symbol is not made, and even during the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times), the small hit game is in progress (special variable winning ball). This is the case when the device 22 is not open).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S52B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 has a RAM 5
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of 5 is read out and stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S53B), and the second reserved storage is stored. The value of the number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54B). That is, R
In the second hold storage number buffer of AM55, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is set to the second hold storage number = n-1. Store in the corresponding storage area. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). The specific method of transmitting the background specification command is as follows in step S60A of the first special symbol normal processing.
It is the same as the process shown in.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S64BB). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68B without performing the processing after step S64B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S64BB, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as the jackpot determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65B. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S64BB, steps S64B to S161B A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

If the jackpot of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 560
Reads a random number for jackpot determination (random number 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S).
64B), the jackpot determination module is executed (step S65B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S67B). ..
Then, based on Random 2, the jackpot types are 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 2R.
It is determined whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot (step S160B).
The jackpot type is memorized (step S161B), and the process proceeds to step S68B.

Further, when the big hit is not made in step S66B, the game control microcomputer 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the big hit is made (step S164B).
, Decide to make a small hit as it is. Then, the process proceeds to step S68B.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be a small hit (forced loss). (Except for cases), but not limited to such aspects. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine whether or not to make a small hit. In this case, although the lottery process is executed, 100
It may be configured so that it is determined as a small hit with a probability of%, or it may be determined as a deviation with a low probability.

Then, in step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although not shown,
The symbol to be stopped is confirmed immediately before step S68B.

In step S65B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit, and determines the big hit type. Based on this, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command to display result 3 specified command, display result 5 specified command to display result 7)
The designated command) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200.

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. 23. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. 25. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

The second large winning opening pre-opening process (step S355) is the same as the first large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304A) shown in FIG. 26. That is, in the first large winning opening pre-opening process shown in FIG. 26, if "first" is read as "second", the second large winning opening pre-opening process is explained.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B).
, Control to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S2203).
B), the process is completed.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S22).
04B). Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0.
That is, it is confirmed whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 will
Check whether the type of jackpot that ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S22).
06B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the jackpot this time (step S220).
8B). Whether or not the player was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before starting the big hit game, the first KT state is set before the big hit starts. The first KT storage flag indicating that the item has been set and the second KT memory flag indicating that the state has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S2208B, these first K
It may be confirmed whether or not the T storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set. If it was neither in the 1st KT state nor in the 2nd KT state before the start of the jackpot, the 1st KT
The flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S2209B). If it was in the 1st KT state or the 2nd KT state before the start of the big hit, set the 2nd KT flag and the 2nd K.
It shifts to the T state (step S2210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

By executing the processes of steps S2208B to S2210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is set before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is,
As described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is configured to perform the left-handed operation, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured assuming that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase the gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the transition to the second KT state is made only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2211B). In addition, 6
Whether or not it is an R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the first KT flag to shift to the first KT state (step S2212B). Step S2213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT count counter (step S2215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2216B).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the process during special symbol change is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the processing during special symbol change is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display for setting the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing the variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, CPU5
6 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. Since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is set in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will continue to be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. Further, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), the special symbol variation display is used. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a discrepancy between the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 200, the display result designation command transmission process also fluctuates. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by 1.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and is based on the fact that the end flag is set. It is also possible to set special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol.

Next, the external output signal output by the game machine 1 will be described. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is in the information output process (step S29), the process of step S2015X in the first special symbol stop process, and the second special symbol stop process. By executing the same process as in step S2015X, an external output signal is output to an external device such as a hall management computer via the external output terminal plate provided in the game machine 1.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output by the game machine 1. A prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal plate. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally every time a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this example) are paid out. Further, a jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire jackpot game. Further, a jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal plate. The jackpot signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the period of all jackpot games, during the probability variation state, and during the KT state (during the first KT state and the second KT state). Further, a special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal that is output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24. Further, a signal for the planned number of prize balls is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal plate. The planned number of prize balls signal is a signal that is output externally every time the planned number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

In the example shown in FIG. 32, a common special winning opening winning signal is output externally without distinguishing between the first KT state and the second KT state. Not limited. For example, it may be configured to externally output different special winning opening winning signals depending on whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the external output signal output by the game machine 1. In the modified example shown in FIG. 33, the special winning port signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope, and the special winning port signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 08 of the external output terminal slope. .. The special winning opening winning signal 1 is a signal output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. Further, the special winning opening winning signal 2 is a signal output externally based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 in the second KT state.

In addition, in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, a signal dedicated to the small hit which is continuously output to the outside during the period of the small hit game may be provided.

Next, a normal symbol process process (step S26C) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (
Specifically, when the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S5111), the CPU 56) executes the gate switch passing process (step S5112). Then, the CPU 56 executes any of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

Gate switch passing process (step S5112): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the count value (gate passing storage number) of the gate passing storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): When the CPU 56 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 10 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 15 is not in the opening / closing operation based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gates is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol).
Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).
Update to a value indicating (specifically, "1").

Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to a value indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102) (specifically, "2").
Update to.

Normal symbol stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if so, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (specifically, ".
Update to 0 "). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "5") indicating the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5102A).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step S5102A): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operating time, and the timer. Start, variable winning ball device 15
Start opening. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100).
Is updated to a value indicating (specifically, "0").

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the number of gate passing memories is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing storage number counter (step S5121).
.. If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing storage number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing storage number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of the gate passing memory counter to 1.
Reduce and shift the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 56 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not the normal symbol hits.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol judgment table is R
It is a collection of data stored in OM54, and is a table in which a normal symbol hit judgment value to be compared with a random number for normal symbol hit judgment (random 4) is set, and is a normal normal symbol used in a normal state. There is a determination table and a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state.

As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, it is determined that the probability of winning is 1/10 in the normal state and 10/11 in the KT state. In the present embodiment, since the probability of hitting a normal symbol differs between the normal state and the KT state, the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is more likely to occur in the KT state than in the normal state. Although the configuration is such that small hits are likely to occur, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be the same in the normal state and the KT state.

Specifically, if the CPU 56 is in the KT state (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set), the CPU 56 selects the normal symbol determination table for KT (Y in step S5123A).
, S5123B), in the normal state (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is not set), the normal normal symbol determination table is selected (N, S in step S5123A).
5123C).

Then, in step S5124, the CPU 56 is in step S5 if it is in the KT state.
It is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination random value read in 122 is a value within the range of [3 to 12], and if it is in the normal state, the normal symbol hit determination random value read in step S5122. Is [3] or not. If it is a hit, a hit symbol is set as a display result (step S5125), and the process proceeds to step S5130A.

Further, in step S5124, if the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range, the CPU 56 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step S5126).
), The process proceeds to step S5130A.

In step S4130A, if the first KT flag is set, the CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol process timer (step S).
5130 Y, S5130B). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5130C in step S5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5131).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process (step S5101). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (step S)
5141 N), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step S5).
144).

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol stop symbol display time on the normal symbol process timer. Set the value (step S5142)
). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102) (step S5143).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hits in step S5124). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step S3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is determined by, for example,
When it is determined to be a hit in step S5124, the normal symbol hit determination flag is set, and it can be confirmed by whether or not the flag is set.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 processes the value of the normal symbol process flag into the normal symbol normal process (N of step S3703).
Update to a value (specifically, "0") indicating step S5100) (step S3708).
..

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (Y in step S3703).
Step S3704), if it is set, that is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3706). When the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3705). ..

Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “5”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step S5102A) (step S516).
4)

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5102A). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3801). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (step S3803). , If set, i.e.
In the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3805). When the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3804).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, the normal electric accessory opening time is 5.5.
By setting the seconds and setting 0.2 seconds as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state, the first KT state starts at the second start winning opening 14 rather than the normal state or the second KT state. It is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning of the second starting winning opening 14 when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the first
In the KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. The number of times may be set to 1 time, whereas in the 1st KT state, 2 times may be set as the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened). That way
In the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened,
It is possible to facilitate starting winning in the second starting winning opening 14.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 shown above and the variable winning ball device 15 as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state (step S380).
6). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103) (step S3807).
..

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory operation process (step S5103). In the normal electric accessory operation process, the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step S3901). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3902). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (step S39)
01 N), the process ends as it is.

In step S3902, when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the closed state (step S3911). Specifically, the variable winning ball device 15 is made by stopping the drive of the solenoid 16.
To be closed.

Then, the CPU 56 processes the value of the normal symbol process flag in the normal symbol normal process (step S).
It is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating 5100) (step S3912).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like is performed (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main processing, the effect control CPU
201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process:
Step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 9a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. .. Further, a background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, the symbol hold storage display unit 18
The hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of c is executed (step S707). In addition, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S708). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is the reception command buffer 1
It consists of a 12-byte area of ~ 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception count counter is 0
It takes a value of ~ 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. In addition, production control I
The interrupt process based on the NT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process that is executed every 4 ms.

43 to 45 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618A).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620).
The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received. After that, the effect control CPU 201 executes the process when the confirmation command is received (step S620A).

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 201 has the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 ends the instruction notification (step S3804). The instruction notification is an effect of notifying how to hit the game ball, the first instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the substantially right side of the game area 7, and the second instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the operating gate 17. Instruction notification is provided. In addition, as the first instruction notification, "right-handed" is applied to the entire surface of the effect display device 9.
A first normal instruction notification for displaying an image containing the characters "right-handed" and a first reduction instruction notification for displaying an image containing the characters "right-handed" are provided in a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9. At the same time, as the second instruction notification, the second normal instruction notification that displays an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" on the entire surface of the effect display device 9 and the "gate" on a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9. There is a second reduction instruction notification that displays an image containing the characters "Aim".

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected within 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. In this case, the image of the second instruction notification is superimposed on the image of the first instruction notification.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 resets the instruction notification timer for measuring the period until the instruction notification is switched from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S380).
5)

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end specification command (step S623),
The effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624A). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624A is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625),
The effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S627),
The effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S628).

If the received effect control command is low probability / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example,). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S631). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S632).

If the received effect control command is low accuracy / first KT background designation (step S633),
The effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a background screen having a green display color) according to the low probability / first KT state (step S634).
.. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S63).
5). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S636).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S637),
The effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a background screen having a yellow display color) according to the high probability / first KT state (step S638).
.. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S639). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S640).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S641),
The effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a background screen having a red display color) according to the high probability / second KT state (step S642).
.. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S643). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S644).

If the received production control command is a large winning opening winning designation command (step S650)
, The effect control CPU 201 adds 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the large winning opening) to the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter, respectively (step S651).

The first prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, and is used as a big prize opening in the big hit game that triggered the start of the consecutive villas and all the big hit games that occurred during the consecutive villas. The prize ball based on the winning of the game ball and the probability change state in the consecutive villa, the 1st KT state and the 2nd KT
In all the small hit games generated in the state, prize balls based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening 24 are added at any time. The second prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and is a jackpot game that triggered the start of the second KT state and all the jackpot games that occurred during the second KT state. A prize ball based on the winning of the game ball in the large winning opening and a prize ball based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the second KT state are added at any time.

Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas indicating the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas on the effect display device 9, it is based on the value of the first prize ball number counter after the addition. If the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is updated and the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is being displayed on the effect display device 9, the second prize ball number counter after addition is displayed. The number of prize balls displayed during the special rush is updated based on the value of (step S652).

If the received production control command is a special prize opening prize designation command (step S653)
, The effect control CPU 201 adds 10 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the special winning opening 24) to the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter, respectively (step S654).
). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the number of prize balls displayed during the consecutive villas, the CPU 201 updates the number of prize balls displayed during the consecutive villas based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition, and also performs a special rush. If the middle prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the second prize ball number counter after addition (step S655).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S656). If the second KT state flag is set (ie,
In the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball addition display (for example, character display such as “+10”) on the effect display device 9 (step S657). Also,
The effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27 (step S6).
At the same time as 58), the special winning opening lamp 24a is turned on and displayed (step S659).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (if it is not the second KT state), the process returns to step S611 without executing the processes of steps S657 to S659.

By executing the processes of steps S656 to S656, in this embodiment,
Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the winning ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are performed, while the special winning opening is displayed. Even if the game ball wins in 24, if it is not in the second KT state, the prize ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are not performed.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to display the prize ball addition display, output the prize sound, and display the lighting of the special prize opening lamp 24a, and it is configured to execute only one or two of these. You may.

If the received production control command is the first customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4)
301), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo command reception flag indicating that the first customer waiting demo display designation command has been received (step S4302).

If the received production control command is the second customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4)
303), the effect control CPU 201 sets the second demo command reception flag indicating that the second customer waiting demo display designation command has been received (step S4304).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect CPU 201 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S6).
70). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving the confirmation command. Production control CPU 2
01 determines whether or not any of the display result 2 designated command to the display result 6 designated command is stored in the display result designated command storage area, and thus whether or not the stopped displayed symbol is a jackpot symbol. Is determined (step S4401). When any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation. It is determined whether or not the command is a command (step S4401A), and if it is the first symbol confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

If the received symbol confirmation command is the second symbol confirmation command, the effect control CP
U201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (if either the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set), step S
Move to 4404.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the preparatory display flag indicating that the jackpot preparing display indicating that the jackpot is fluctuating has already been executed is set (step S4402). If it is set, the preparing display flag is reset (step S4403), and the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the instruction notification timer (step S4404).
4406).

Further, in step S4402, if the preparatory display flag indicating that the preparatory display has been executed is not set, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. To do. The "preparing display" is an effect that is executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state. Specifically, the characters "preparing for the jackpot" are displayed. This is an effect in which the included image is displayed on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, a case where a still image including the characters "preparing for a big hit" is displayed is shown, but not limited to such a mode, for example, a big hit game is started as a display in preparation. Period until (remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol)
It may be configured to perform the display corresponding to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Also, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, KT
If it is in a state, the first normal instruction notification is performed. In addition, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed only when the preparing display is executed in the normal state, and the preparing display is not executed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S706) shown in FIG. 41.
First, the effect control CPU 201 performs an instruction notification control process for controlling the instruction notification (step S4501), and a demo display control process for controlling the demo display (step S4501).
Step S4502) is performed.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 is set in step S according to the value of the background symbol process flag.
Any one of 900 to S908 is performed. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Background symbol change start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 9c starts the change. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. And
The background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902).

Background symbol change processing (step S902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is set to the background symbol stop processing (step S90).
Update to the value corresponding to 3). In addition, in the processing during the background symbol change, the effect control CPU 2
01 may extend the fluctuation time of the background symbol.

Background symbol stop processing (step S903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit medium process (step S908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904), the jackpot display process (step S904) is performed on condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908), the small hit middle display processing (step S) is performed on condition that the small hit start designation command is received.
Update to the value corresponding to 908).

Big hit display process (step S904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S905).

Processing during the round (step S905): Display control during the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening is received, which indicates that the large winning opening is open (closed), interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

Small hit middle processing (step S908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process. In the instruction notification control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first instruction notification is in progress (step S).
4601), and if the first instruction notification is in progress, the value of the instruction notification timer is subtracted by 1 (step S460).
2), it is determined whether or not the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If the time-out has occurred (10 seconds have passed since the execution of the first instruction notification), the second normal instruction notification is started if the first normal instruction notification is being executed (Y, S460 in step S3503).
5) If the first reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduction display notification is started (step S45).
06).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. Further, when the first normal instruction notification is executed, the second normal instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds, and when the first reduction instruction notification is executed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds. It becomes.

When executing the second instruction notification image, the second instruction notification image may be superimposed and displayed on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be deleted and the second instruction notification image may be displayed. It may be displayed.

49 and 50 are flowcharts showing the demo display control process. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo command reception flag is set (step S4701), and if it is not set, step S470.
Move to 6. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S).
4702) If it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, the normal state is determined.

In the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 takes time to start the first demo display (
For example, the first demo standby timer for measuring the value corresponding to (30 seconds) is set (step S4703), and the first demo waiting flag indicating that the first demo display is waiting is set (step S4703). S4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step S).
4705).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo waiting flag is set (step S4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step S4707). Y), or when the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step S4708), the process proceeds to step S4712.
As a result, the first demo display is not executed when the first special symbol change is started or the jackpot game state is controlled based on the change of the second special symbol. Specifically, in step S4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

When the first demo waiting flag is set, the first special symbol change is not started (N in step S4707), and the jackpot game state is not controlled based on the change in the second special symbol (N in step S4708). , The value of the first demo standby timer is subtracted by 1 (step S4709).
), When the first demo standby timer times out, the first demo display is started (step S4711), and the first demo standby flag is reset (step S4712).

After that, when the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the first demo (step S4713).
Y), when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S4714), or when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step S4715).
, The first demo display is finished (step S4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo command reception flag is set (step S4801), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step S480).
2) If it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step S4805. Specifically, if any of the first KT flag and the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the state is KT.

In the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 takes time to start the second demo display (
For example, a second demo wait timer for measuring a value corresponding to (30 seconds) is set (step S4803), and a second demo wait flag indicating that the second demo display is waiting is set (step S4803). S4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step S).
4805).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo waiting flag is set (step S4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step S4807). Y) or not in the KT state (step S4808)
N), the process proceeds to step S4812. As a result, the second demo display is not executed when the second special symbol change is started or the KT state is terminated. Specifically, in step S4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4808, if either the first KT flag or the second KT flag is not set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

If the second demo waiting flag is set, the second special symbol fluctuation is not started (N in step S4807), and the KT state is not completed (Y in step S4808), the value of the second demo standby timer. Is subtracted by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demo standby timer times out, the second demo display is started (step S4811), and the second demo standby flag is reset (step S4812).

After that, when the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the second demo (step S4813).
Y), when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started (Y in step S4814), or when the KT state ends (N in step S4815), the second demo display ends (step S4).
816).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S901).
In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols are completely inconsistent are matched. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. In addition, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot).
Determines the combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered symbols. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are even numbers. To determine. In addition, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot is determined), the same combination as the reach-off symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. In addition, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the small hit symbol (for example, "13"
5 ”) Determine the combination of background symbols.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S921). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S922). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S923). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the background symbol display unit 9c, VDP
A control signal (display control execution data) is output to 209. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. Further, in order to output audio from the speaker 27, the audio output board 70
The control signal (sound number data) is output to.

When the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation patterns # 17 and # 18), the process in step S923 and the background symbol variation process described later is performed according to the process table selected in step S921. By executing the process of step S944, the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol. In addition, when the execution of the battle effect is specified in the fluctuation pattern (second fluctuation pattern # 11, # 12, # 14).
, # 15, # 18), the process of step S923 and step S944 of the background symbol changing process described later is executed according to the process table selected in step S921, so that the battle effect is produced during the background symbol variation display. Is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S924). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902) (step S925).

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process process. In the process during background symbol change, the effect control CPU 201
First, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step S940), and the value of the normal symbol fluctuation time timer is subtracted by 1 (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S).
943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S944).
).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol and it is the start timing of the continuous effect (step S94).
5). It should be noted that whether or not the continuous effect is executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation patterns # 17 and # 18 are specified in the received variation pattern command. Further, whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in step S924 of the background symbol variation start processing. If it is the start timing of the continuous production, the production control CPU 20
In the production display device 9, the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is displayed based on the current value of the first prize ball number counter (step S946). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls displayed during the special rush is displayed when the player is in the second KT state (see step S9010 described later), but the start timing of the continuous effect during the second KT state is displayed. Then, by executing the process of step S946, the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is displayed in addition to the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed during the variable display of the background symbol and it is the start timing of the first effect (step S947). It should be noted that whether or not the first KT transition effect is executed can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second variation pattern # 18 is specified by the received variation pattern command. That is, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the background symbol is executed based on the second variation pattern # 18, whether the continuation effect is executed during the variation display of the background symbol and the second KT state continues. After it is suggested whether or not, the first KT transition effect is executed, and the effect as if the second KT state ends and the state shifts to the first KT state is executed (however,
At this stage, the second KT state has not been completed internally yet, and to be exact, the second KT state is terminated at the start of the big hit), and then the battle production develops. Further, whether or not it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect is determined by, for example, step S of the background symbol change start processing.
It can be determined by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in 924.

If it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect, the effect control CPU 201 ends the sound output of the second KT music from the speaker 27 (step S948). That is, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is controlled, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggered the control (step described later). (See S982), but when the process of step S948 is executed, the sound output of the music for the second KT is terminated.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 erases the display of the number of prize balls during the consecutive villas and the display of the number of prize balls during the special rush in the effect display device 9 (step S949). Further, in this embodiment, the character display such as "during special rush" is displayed in the second KT state, but in step S949, the character display such as "during special rush" is also deleted.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes the background symbol variation time extension process (step S950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the first There is a possibility that the variable display of the special symbol may be started, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process of step S950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol, the other special symbol is executed. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

In step S950, for example, when the effect control CPU 201 is executing the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one of the special symbols that is out of alignment, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is displayed. When it is started, it is replaced with the fluctuation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit, and the fluctuation time is extended. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that is a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that is out of order is started, the background symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of the background symbol currently being executed is executed as it is without replacing the fluctuation pattern or extending the fluctuation time. Further, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes a big hit, and the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes a big hit is started, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol that is started later is forcibly removed in the middle, the variation pattern of the background symbol is not replaced or the variation time is not extended, and the background currently being executed is not performed. The variable display of the symbol is executed as it is.

Further, when the effect control CPU 201 is undergoing jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S5000, Y in S5001).
, S5002 Y), the jackpot preparation display is executed (step S5003), and the preparation display flag is set (step S5004). In step S5000, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the normal state is set. In step S5001, the process during the change of the second decorative symbol is executed in the second decorative symbol process process (step S705B), and the display result 2 designation command for the second decorative symbol ~
Display result 6 If any of the designated commands is stored, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. In step S5002, it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol has started when the variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received.

As described above, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started while the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is being performed in the normal state, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly excluded. At that time, the game control microcomputer 560 may send a forced disconnection designation command indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to be missed to the effect control microcomputer 200. In that case, the effect control may be performed. Microcomputer 20
0 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the receipt of the forced loss designation command. Alternatively, only when the variation display result is determined to be forced out, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special variation pattern in which the variation display result is determined only by forced error, and the variation pattern showing this special variation pattern. The command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. Good.

Then, if the background symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S951), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol fluctuation stop process (step S903) (step S952). ).

53 and 54 are flowcharts showing the background symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S903) in the background symbol process processing. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S987. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S986. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, step S9
The process proceeds to step S987 without executing the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol of 71.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 uses the effect display device 9 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972)
), The effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).
).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 receives one of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (
It is confirmed whether or not the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag) are set (step S974). When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1).
, The effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is controlled according to the sound number data 1) (step S978).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag is set (step S979). If none of the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the low probability / non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball counter. (Step S980). That is, since it is a case where a big hit occurs in a low probability / non-KT state, it is a case where a so-called first hit occurs, and the first prize ball number counter is reset.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S981). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability variation jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot,
Since it is the case that the big hit game that triggers the start of the second KT state is started, the CP for effect control
The U201 controls the speaker 27 to start the sound output of the music for the second KT (step S982).

On the other hand, if it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball number counter if it is set (step S983). That is, in this case, if the player is in the second KT state, a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs and the second KT
Since this is the case when the state ends, the second prize ball number counter is reset.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 displays the value of the background symbol process flag as a jackpot display process (
The value is updated according to step S904) (step S984).

When the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S985)
), The effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S986).
).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S987). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S988).
The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S989). If the second KT state flag is set (ie,
(If in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S990). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S991), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the production device (effect display device 9 as a production part,
Control of various lamps as production parts and speakers 27) as production parts is executed (step S992).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 from the speaker 27 (step S993), and the special winning opening lamp 2
4a is lit and displayed (step S994).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S995 without executing the processes of steps S990 to S994. By executing the determination process of step S989, in this embodiment, the effect during the small hit game is executed only when the small hit game is performed during the second KT state.
A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 is output, and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed.

In this embodiment, when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, a predetermined opening sound is output and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to execute only one of the output of a predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a. Further, for example, even during the second KT state, it may be configured so that neither the output of these predetermined opening sounds nor the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a is executed, and the effect during the small hit game is produced in the first place. Or, it may be configured not to execute the small hit medium processing itself.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908) (step S995).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is,
When the out-of-order symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S985)
, The effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S996).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process process. In the jackpot end effect processing, the effect control CPU 201
First, the value of the effect period measurement timer is subtracted by 1 (step S9000). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the round post-processing (see step S906). Next, the effect control CPU 201
It is confirmed whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S9002), and the effect device (effect display device 9) follows the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27, etc.) (step S9003). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9006).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot (step S9007). ). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by, for example, a display result specification command (display result 3 designation command) that specifies the 6R probability variation jackpot or a display result specification command (display result 5) that specifies the 2R probability variation jackpot. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the specified command) has been received. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / first KT state after the jackpot game ends), the effect control CPU 201 is not displayed.
The effect display device 9 controls to start the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas based on the first prize ball number counter (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during normal rush".

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 201
Confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be completed this time is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot (step S9009). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not a display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for designating the 16R probability variation jackpot has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / second KT state after the jackpot game ends), the effect control CPU 201
If it is not displayed, the effect display device 9 controls to start displaying the prize ball number display during the special rush based on the second prize ball number counter (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during special rush".

Although not shown in FIG. 55, if the jackpot game that ends this time is based on a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot (that is, a low probability state after the jackpot game ends /
In the case of the first KT state), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "chance time".

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9011).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201).
). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S9203).
). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

However, as already described, in this embodiment, when not in the second KT state,
In the first place, the process table corresponding to the small hit medium production is not set (step S98).
9), even if the small hit end designation command is not received, the effect corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207. Move to. Then, the effect control CPU 201
The value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

57 and 58 are explanatory views showing a display example of instruction notification according to the present embodiment.
In the display example shown in FIG. 57, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is shown. For example, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), the background symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. 57 (2), the background symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the first normal instruction notification 55A is performed. The first normal instruction notification 55A at this time is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second normal instruction notification 55B is performed as shown in FIG. 57 (4).

At this time, the second normal instruction notification 55B has the characters "Aim at the gate" and the operating gate 1.
By displaying an image showing a game ball passing through No. 7 (a square area through which the game ball is passing shows an operating gate 17, and a square area above it shows a gate 32). It is said.

In the display example shown in FIG. 58, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (1).
The first demo is displayed because the first special symbol is not changed even though it is in the normal state, and the jackpot change of the second decorative symbol is performed. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the jackpot preparation display is performed and the preparation display flag is set, and then in FIG. 58 (3). As shown, the second with the jackpot symbol
The change of the special symbol ends. At this time, since the preparing display flag is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (4), and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17. In addition, as shown in FIG. 58 (5), the second normal instruction notification 5
6B is performed. At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed separately in parallel, or the second normal instruction notification 5A may be displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A.
Only 6B may be displayed.

At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B operates with the characters "aim at the gate". By displaying an image showing a game ball passing through the gate 17 (a square area through which the game ball is passing shows an operating gate 17, and a square area above it shows a gate 32). Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), when the change of the second special symbol is completed in the jackpot symbol without the change of the first special symbol being performed, the first reduction is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (7). Instruction notification 5
When 6C is performed and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, FIG.
As shown in 8 (8), the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed.

At this time, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed by displaying only the image showing the characters "right-handed". Further, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only the image showing the characters "Aim at the gate".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot change of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the first special symbol is changed, the jackpot preparation is displayed and the change of the first special symbol is performed. When is not performed, the execution of the jackpot preparation display is restricted (not executed).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed when the first special symbol is changed. When the first special symbol is not changed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification, which are less visible than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification, are performed.

FIG. 59 is a timing chart when the jackpot gaming state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 59 shows the presence / absence of control of the jackpot game state, the first KT.
Whether or not the flag is set, whether or not the normal symbol change is executed, whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is opened,
The presence / absence of fluctuation of the second special symbol and the presence / absence of opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 are shown for each timing.

For example, while the jackpot game state is controlled (before timing T0 in FIG. 59), the normal symbol has a fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the normal symbol has a fluctuation stop time of 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 2.6 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 0.2 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 1.0 second, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of 2.6 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. While the jackpot game state is controlled, the special symbol is not changed and the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to open.

Further, while being controlled to the first KT state (after timing T0 in FIG. 59), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 0.1 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0.
It is 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 2 seconds, 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol, and 0.1 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. In addition, 7.0 seconds is the first fluctuation time of the second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state, which is a special variable winning ball device 22 at the time of a small hit.
The opening time of 0.8 seconds is 0.8 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol after the second time after being controlled to the first KT state is 1.0 seconds (assuming that the second reserved memory number ≥ 1). Set.

At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 (3.
(8 seconds), the fluctuation time (7.0) of the first second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state.
Seconds) is longer. This is, for example, the variable winning ball device 1 immediately before the timing T0.
It is assumed that the variable winning ball device 15 will be closed for a maximum of 2.6 seconds when the standby before opening of 5 is started, and the first second special after being controlled to the first KT state. If the fluctuation time of the symbol is too short, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be controlled to the open state while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, and the special variable winning ball device will be in the first KT state. 2
It is conceivable that the game ball wins in 2. Therefore, the variation time of the second special symbol is lengthened so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to be open while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and controlled.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of performing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and is a predetermined path among the flow paths through which the game medium flows down. (In this example, a specific area (in this example, the operating gate 17) provided in the game area 7 on the right side) through which the game medium can pass, and predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). After the establishment of, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560). When it is Y in step S2501, steps S305 to S307, S
(Part of executing 355 to S357), it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, a step in the game control microcomputer 560). The part that executes S358 to S360) can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that in the normal state (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560). Steps S2208A, S
2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B), a predetermined promotion notification (in this example, the first instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route is executed based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification, the specific promotion notification (in this example, the second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium into the specific area can be executed. (In this example, the part that executes steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. A game machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through a specific area is described, and the game machine appropriately notifies the opportunity to control the advantageous state. However, if a notification for prompting the launch of the game medium to a specific area is performed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied, the production may become complicated. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

For example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol after the KT state ends and the normal state is entered, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is long, so that the second special symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the player leaves the seat for reasons such as a break without waiting for the fluctuation of. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to control so as not to be in the big hit game state during the break by appropriately notifying the opportunity to control the big hit game state.

Further, unlike the game machine described above, there is a game machine having a configuration in which the jackpot game state is controlled on condition that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the operating gate 17. , The player waits until the jackpot game state starts (until the jackpot is opened) after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed for the purpose of suppressing wasteful hitting of the game ball, and then launches the game ball. May be done. Similarly, in a game machine that shifts to the jackpot game state on the condition that the game ball passes through the operating gate 17, such a player also has a game ball from the time when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game state is started. It may try to wait for launch, in which case the jackpot game state will not start. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify such a player of the opportunity to control the jackpot game state.

Further, specific examples of the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification are not limited to those described above. Specifically, an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a game effect lamp 9).
Or a light emitting member such as a decorative LED) may be used as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. In addition, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed as a predetermined promotion notification and a specific promotion notification. Further, the effect members used for the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification may be different from each other. For example, in the predetermined promotion notification, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light.
In the specific promotion notification, a predetermined screen may be displayed on the effect display device 9.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, a big hit signal 1 and a big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled in an advantageous state (in this example, game control). In step S2015X and the second special symbol stop process in the microcomputer 560, the same process as in step S2015X is executed), and the advantageous state signal can be output externally based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions (in this example,). The game control microcomputer 560 has a first special symbol stop process and a second special symbol stop process in step S25.
It was decided to execute step S2015X before executing 01). As a result, it is possible to notify the game clerk that the unmanned game machine without a player has become advantageous.
Initialization of the game machine can be promoted.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power of the game machine is turned on, it may be possible to notify that fact (in this example, the game control). In the microcomputer 560, the game ball is activated after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.
Information on the current situation (the situation of waiting for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17) when the power is turned off before passing through 7 (in this example, it corresponds to the process of waiting for the passage of the first gate). The value of the special symbol process flag "8") is backed up, and if the information is backed up when the power is turned on, a predetermined command is issued to the effect control microcomputer 20.
It is transmitted to 0, and when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives the predetermined command, it notifies the establishment of the predetermined condition by executing the first instruction notification, the second instruction notification, or the effect that can be executed only when the power is turned on. You may do it). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the specific promotion notification may be executed in different modes depending on the situation in which the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 is generated). The second instruction notification may be executed in a different manner depending on the type of jackpot to be played and the game state). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state according to the situation.

Specifically, when the fluctuation is performed using the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the jackpot, a battle production in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is performed as the effect during the fluctuation, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed before the victory or defeat of the confrontation is shown. At the same time, "Aim at the gate" is displayed, and in the subsequent big hit game state, the battle production is continued as a big hit production (that is, the variable production and the big hit production are a series of battle productions). Good. At that time, if the jackpot is of an advantageous type (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds, a jackpot with a long opening period of the jackpot, a jackpot that shifts to a probabilistic state, a jackpot that shifts to a KT state), the battle is won. If it is a big hit of a disadvantageous type (for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds, a big hit with a short opening period of the big winning opening, a big hit that does not shift to the probability change state, a big hit that does not shift to the KT state), it will be defeated in the battle. May be good.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example) are executed. It is possible (in this example, steps S26A and S2 in the game control microcomputer 560.
The display result can be derived and displayed by executing the variable display of the first effect identification information (in this example, the first decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (the part where 6B is executed). The second effect identification information (in this example, in this example) corresponding to the variable display of the two identification information (in this example, the second special symbol).
It is possible to derive and display the display result by executing the variable display of the second decorative symbol) (in this example, the part where steps S705A and S705B in the effect control microcomputer 200 are executed), and in the normal state, the second effect. The variable display of the identification information may be difficult to see, and the display result of the variable display of the second effect identification information may be easy to see (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200 is the first in the normal state. 2 The second decorative symbol may be deleted while the special symbol is changing, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed). This makes it possible to pay attention to the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state.

Further, in the normal state, it may be difficult to visually recognize the display result of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol and the display related to the second reserved storage number.

It should be noted that "difficult to see" is a concept including "not visible" and "difficult to see".

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, it is a game machine capable of executing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), and a specific area through which the game medium can pass (a specific area (in this example). In this example, the operation gate 17), the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol), and the second
The variable display of the identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed, and the first identification information and the second identification can be executed during the execution of the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information. It is possible to execute the other variable display of information (in this example, the game control microcomputer 5).
By executing steps S26A and S26B in 60, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel), predetermined conditions (in this example, in this example).
After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), it is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example, the jackpot game state). , Y in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560.
In this case, steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), and it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, the small hit game state). , Step S35 in the game control microcomputer 560
8 to S360), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is higher than that in the normal state (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560). Steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B
, S2213B, S2214B), it is possible to execute a specific promotion notification (in this example, a second instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium into a specific area based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied ( In this example, step S4 in the effect control microcomputer 200.
604, S4605), when the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the player (in this example, the first special symbol is not changed even though it is in the normal state) is not satisfied. When the specific promotion notification is executed in the predetermined mode (in this example, the second normal instruction notification is performed) based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information, and the absence condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information.
The specific promotion notification is executed in a special mode having lower visibility than the predetermined mode (in this example, the second reduction instruction notification is performed). Thereby, in consideration of the absence condition being satisfied, the specific promotion notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific area can be appropriately performed.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying a big hit symbol indicating a big hit) is satisfied. A game machine that controls the game medium to an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through the specific area is described, but the game machine promotes the launch of the game medium to the specific area. There was a risk that the specific promotion notification could not be properly performed. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification that promotes the launch of the game medium to the specific area in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

For example, in the case of a gaming machine that performs a second normal instruction notification (notification in the entire display area of the effect display device 9) even when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the game is finally played. When the final player who has been playing the game has already finished the game, but the other player is temporarily away from the seat and plays the game of the game machine. It is conceivable that a new player may be reluctant to play a game on the game machine because he thinks that it may lead to trouble. Therefore, as in the game machine shown in the present embodiment, by performing the specific promotion notification in a mode according to the situation, it is possible to eliminate the consciousness of avoidance by the new player and promote the operation of the game machine. be able to.

In addition, there are those who try to enjoy the advantageous situation (big hit game state) generated based on the game by the player who has finished the game, and if such an act is performed, the fairness of the game is lacking. It becomes. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied (when there is no player), the visibility is lower than when the absence condition is not satisfied (when there is a player). By executing the specific promotion notification in, it is difficult to recognize that the situation is before the advantageous situation, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In the present embodiment, it is set as an "absence condition" that the first special symbol is not changed even though it is in the normal state (to be exact, the change of the first special symbol is started in the normal state). When it happens, it is considered that the absence condition is no longer satisfied), but it is not limited to this. For example, the player does not touch the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 5, or any area (operation gate 17, gate 32, first start winning opening 13, second starting winning opening 14, large winning opening, etc. The "absence condition" may be that the passage of the game ball to the special winning opening 24) is not detected for a predetermined period. Further, for example, it may be set as an "absence condition" that the start winning prize does not occur within a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied, the absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the specific promotion notification is performed in the predetermined mode (in this example, the absence effect). , 1st demo display) can be executed (in this example, the part where step S4716 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 200). Thereby, the player's game can be appropriately promoted.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, the power consumption is controlled to reduce the power consumption on condition that a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed since the demo display was started. It may be. In the power saving state, it is consumed in each effect member by reducing the volume output from the speaker 27, reducing the brightness of the image display device 5, and reducing the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The power is reduced.

Further, according to this embodiment, the execution of the effect is controlled based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) and the information transmitted from the game control means. Production control means (in this example, the production control microcomputer 200
), And the game control means includes the first absence information (in this example, the first customer waiting demo display designation command) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first identification information, and the second. It is possible to transmit the second absence information (in this example, the second customer waiting demo display designation command) indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the identification information (in this example, the game control microcomputer). The part where steps S51A and S51B are executed in 560). This will
It is possible to perform an appropriate production according to the situation.

In the present embodiment, the first customer waiting demo display designation command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol and the absence condition are satisfied based on the second special symbol. It was decided to separately provide a second customer waiting demo display designation command to indicate whether or not, but it is not limited to this, and a command to indicate whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the first special symbol, A common command may be provided as a command indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied based on the second special symbol. For example, in the normal state, the first
When the first special symbol is not changed in the state where the hold memory is not stored (regardless of the presence or absence of the change of the second special symbol or the presence or absence of the second hold memory), the common command is transmitted. , In the KT state, when the second special symbol is not changed in the state where the second reserved memory is not stored (regardless of the presence or absence of the change of the first special symbol or the presence or absence of the first reserved memory). You may send a common command.

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means includes a game control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the game control means. Special state control information indicating whether or not it is controlled to a special state (background specification command in this example) and absence information indicating whether or not the absence condition is satisfied (in this example, the first customer waiting demo display) It is possible to send a designated command and a second customer waiting demo display designated command (in this example, steps S51A, S51B, S60 in the game control microcomputer 560).
The effect control means (the part that executes A and S60B) can execute the absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied based on the special state control information and the absence information (in this example, the effect control micro). In step S4502 of the computer 200, the customer waiting demo display can be executed based on the background designation command and the customer waiting demo display designation command). As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

Further, according to this embodiment, information indicating whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information can be stored as a hold storage (in this example, the second hold storage). A means (in this example, a second hold storage buffer) is provided, and an advantageous notification effect (in this example, a big hit effect) indicating control to an advantageous state can be executed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200). Steps S904 to S907 in steps), the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold storage indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state is started during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information controlled in the advantageous state. If this is done, the advantageous notification effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is not executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is in step S).
By not performing the processing after step S65B in the case of Y of 64BB, even if the jackpot random number is stored as the second reserved storage, the fluctuation with respect to the second reserved storage is forcibly removed, and the effect is produced. The control microcomputer 200 does not perform the jackpot effect regarding the second identification information). As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the situation.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing the game, and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) is variablely displayed and the second identification information. The variable display of (in this example, the second special symbol) can be executed, and the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed during the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information. The other variable display can be executed (in this example, by executing steps S26A and S26B in the game control microcomputer 560, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel. Specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) as the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information.
Can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display (in this example, steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the game control microcomputer 560). The predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, a portion that executes steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560). It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased as compared with the normal state (in this example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, in the game control microcomputer 560. S2213B, S221
4B is executed), and it is possible to execute a notification effect (in this example, a jackpot preparation display) that notifies that a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, step S5003 in the effect control microcomputer 200 is executed). Part) When the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the player in the normal state is not satisfied, the notification effect can be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information (this). In the example, when the effect control microcomputer 200 is Y in step S5000, Y in S5001, and Y in S5002, S
5003 is executed), and the execution of the notification effect is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information when the absence condition is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, for effect control). The microcomputer 200 has Y in step S5000 and Y in S5001.
, S5003 is not executed when it is N of S5002). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, a big hit symbol indicating a big hit is stopped and displayed) is satisfied. A game machine that controls an advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes through a specific area is described, but the game machine appropriately notifies that a predetermined condition is satisfied. There was a risk that it could not be done. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied in consideration of the fact that the absence condition is satisfied.

Note that "restricting execution" means not executing as in the present embodiment or executing in a mode that is difficult to recognize (for example, executing a notification effect using an image smaller than usual or an image having a low density). It is a concept that includes (execution of a notification effect that outputs sound at a volume lower than usual).

Further, the specific example of the notification effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one. Specifically, an effect using an effect member other than the effect display device 9 (for example, a speaker 27, a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED) may be used as a notification effect. Further, as the notification effect, an effect using a plurality of effect members may be performed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a game medium (in this example, a game medium). A variable starting device (in this example, a variable starting device) that can be changed into an approach advantageous state (in this example, an open state) in which a game ball can enter and an approach disadvantageous state (in this example, a closed state) in which a game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. , A variable winning ball device 15) and a predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state. The variable starting device can be changed and controlled to an approach advantageous state or an approach disadvantageous state (in this example, a part in which step S5103 is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be variably displayed based on the game medium entering the variable starting device (in this example). , Step S26A in the game control microcomputer 560
, S26B execution part), Hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as hold storage (second hold storage in this example) (second hold storage buffer in this example)
The predetermined variable device is provided based on the fact that the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). It is possible to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) that changes to an approach advantageous state (in this example, a portion that executes steps S358 to S360 in the game control microcomputer 560), which is more predetermined than the normal state. It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled by the state is increased (in this example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B in the game control microcomputer 560).
, S2214B is executed as the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the second special state (high in this example) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. It can be controlled to (probability / second KT state), and when it is controlled to the advantageous state, the variable starting device is changed to the entry disadvantage state for a specific period longer than when it is controlled to the first special state. It is possible (in this example, step S2 in the game control microcomputer 560.
By executing 6C, as shown in FIG. 59, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the jackpot game state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is set to 0 in the first KT state.
.. The variable display of the first second identification information controlled by the first special state (the part controlled to the closed state for 5 seconds) is the variable display of the first period regardless of the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means. (In this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and the first variation is varied using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G). By determining the pattern, it is possible to change the second special symbol for 7.0 seconds regardless of the number of reserved memories), and it is controlled to the first special state and the second and subsequent times.
As the variable display of the identification information, when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is a predetermined number or more, the variable display of the second period shorter than the first period can be executed (the variable display of the identification information is possible. In this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state and is 2
In the fluctuation after the first time, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (E) or FIG. 14 (H), and if the second reserved storage number is 1 or more, 1.0 second (1st K).
It is possible to execute the fluctuation of the second special symbol over a time (a time shorter than the first fluctuation time of 7.0 seconds) controlled by the T state). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starting device (attacker) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is a gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state in a state, can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an approach disadvantageous state. Described is a game machine in which the game medium is made easier to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state by delaying the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device, and the degree of advantage in the special state is enhanced. However, in the game machine, the playability in a special state is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state.

For example, in this embodiment, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, the inside of the special variable winning ball device 22 is actually reached. The special winning ball device 24 is set so as to rarely win a prize, but in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22
There is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the above, and if the special variable winning ball device 22 is immediately controlled to the open state, a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. There is a possibility that it will end up. Therefore, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 accumulate on the bottom surface member even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls are dropped, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24, which is more than expected in the first KT state. It prevents the situation where the prize ball of is obtained.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided,
It is possible to suppress the entry of the game ball into the predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in a part of the special state (first KT state). Therefore, a part of the special states (first KT state) can be set as a special state having a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize that the degrees of advantage of the plurality of special states are different.

Further, according to this embodiment, the first variable display of the second identification information controlled by the first special state is longer than the specific period regardless of the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means. It is possible to execute variable display for one period (in this example, the game control microcomputer 5).
60 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first variation, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G), so that the variation pattern is 7.0 regardless of the number of reserved memories. The second special symbol can be changed over a second (a time longer than the closing time of the variable winning ball device 15 in the jackpot game state of 3.8 seconds), and the second special symbol is controlled to the first special state.
As the variable display of the second identification information after the first time, when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the first special state is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the variable display of the second period shorter than the specific period is executed. It is possible (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and the fluctuation pattern is used for the second and subsequent fluctuations using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (E) or FIG. 14 (H). If the second reserved memory number is 1 or more by determining, the second special symbol is used for 1.0 second (a time shorter than the closing time of the variable winning ball device 15 in the jackpot game state of 3.8 seconds). Fluctuations are feasible). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, when the control is performed in the second special state, the second identification information is held regardless of the number of times the second identification information is variably displayed after being controlled in the second special state. The variable display of the second identification information may be executed at different fluctuation times based on the number of reserved storages stored in the storage means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560).
When the second special symbol is changed in the second KT state, regardless of the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled in the second KT state, if the second reserved storage number is 1 or more, the second is over 1 second. The special symbol may be changed, and if the second reserved memory number is 0, the second special symbol may be changed for 3 seconds. ). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the identification information (in this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is variably displayed, which is an advantageous state for the player (this example). Then,
A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and has a special area (gate 32 in this example) through which a game medium (game ball in this example) can pass, and an approach advantageous state (gate 32 in this example) in which the game medium can enter. In this example, a variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can change between an open state) and a disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and variable starting. A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) provided on the downstream side of the device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state is provided, and is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the special area. It is possible to execute the variable display of the normal identification information (in this example, the normal symbol) (in this example, the part where steps S5100 to S5102 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and based on the variable display of the normal identification information. It is possible to change the variable starting device to an approach advantageous state (in this example, the part where step S5103 is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the game medium is identified based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device. The variable display of information can be executed (in this example, the part where step S26B is executed in the game control microcomputer 560), and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). Based on the above, it is possible to control the predetermined variable device to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) in which the predetermined variable device is changed to an approach advantageous state (in this example, steps S358 to 560 in the game control microcomputer 560). The part that executes S360) can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) with a higher frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, the KT state).
Steps S2208A, S2211A in the game control microcomputer 560,
As special states (parts that execute S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B), a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and a second special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and a second special state having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state (in this example). In this example, it is possible to control to high probability / second KT state), and in the first special state, the game medium that has passed through the special area enters the variable starting device when the variable display of the normal identification information is not performed. The variable starting device is controlled so as to be possible (in this example, the shortest time required from the game ball passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.
It is 6 seconds, and in the first KT state, one game ball opens the gate 32 in the first KT state by controlling the variable winning ball device 15 to the open state 0.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the gate 32. When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state when passing through, the one game ball can win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the special situation.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952 includes a variable starting device (attacker) capable of changing between an approach advantageous state in which a game medium can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is a gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state in a state, can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an approach disadvantageous state. Described is a game machine in which the game medium is made easier to enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit game state by delaying the game ball flowing down on the predetermined variable device, and the degree of advantage in the special state is enhanced. However, in the game machine, the playability in a special state is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the special state.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol at the timing of stopping the fluctuation ().
In the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the variable winning ball device 15 does not open by the time the game ball passing through the gate 32 reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22. , The special winning opening 24 can be won). On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided,
It is possible to suppress the entry of the game ball into the predetermined variable device (special variable winning ball device 22) in a part of the special state (first KT state). Therefore, a part of the special states (first KT state) can be set as a special state having a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize that the degrees of advantage of the plurality of special states are different.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the second special state, the variable starting device is controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 1 is controlled in the second KT state.
5 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds), and the variable starter is set so that the game medium that has passed through the special area cannot easily enter the variable starter when the variable display of the identification information is not normally performed. Control (in this example, the shortest time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and the game ball flows down on the variable winning ball device 15. The time to play is 0.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds. Therefore, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the second KT state. When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, the one game ball remains as it is in the variable winning ball device 1
It is difficult to win 5). As a result, it is possible to easily give a profit to the player in the second special state.

In the present embodiment, the second KT state has a longer fluctuation time of the normal symbol than the first KT state, so that the second KT state has a variable prize over a longer period than the first KT state. It was decided to control the ball device 15 to the closed state, but the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state by other controls. May be realized.

For example, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state by configuring the second KT state to have a longer symbol determination time than the first KT state. It may be realized to control the state.

Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the second KT state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit ( By making the configuration (the time before opening of the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 38) longer, it is realized that the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state. You may.

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol, and the adjustment of a plurality of times of the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit are combined. By doing so, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the second KT state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the normal state, the variable starting device is controlled in an approach disadvantageous state for a longer period than in the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 56).
As shown in FIG. 15 (1), 0 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the closed state for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, and 3 in the normal state as in the second KT state. The variable starter is controlled so that the game medium that has passed through the special area cannot easily enter the variable starter when the variable display of the identification information is not normally performed (controlled in the closed state for 8 seconds) (control to the closed state). In this example, the minimum time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow down on the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds. It is 0.5 seconds, and in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds. Therefore, when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 Is controlled to the open state, it is difficult for the one game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, the game medium is launched aiming at the special area in the normal state (
Right-handed) can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the normal symbol has a longer fluctuation time in the normal state than in the first KT state, so that the normal state has a variable winning ball device over a longer period than the first KT state. Although it was decided to control the 15 to the closed state, it was realized that the variable winning ball device 15 could be controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state by other controls. You may.

For example, by configuring the symbol determination time of the normal symbol to be longer in the normal state than in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state. It may be realized to control.

Further, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, in the normal state than in the first KT state, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit (FIG. FIG. By making the configuration (the time before opening the normal electric accessory shown in 38) longer, the normal state is the first.
It may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state for a period longer than the KT state.

In addition, the above-mentioned fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol, and the adjustment of a plurality of times of the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit are combined. By doing so, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the closed state in the normal state for a longer period than in the first KT state.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the small hit game state cannot be controlled based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the small hit symbol. Based on this, the configuration may be such that the small hit game state can be controlled. In that case, when the change of the second special symbol is started while the small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is being performed, the second
The special symbol may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to be a big hit or a small hit (it does not become a normal loss) except when it is a forced loss.
The present invention is not limited to this, and even when the second special symbol is changed, it may be a normal deviation. For example, by setting the small hit ratio to 1/2, it is possible to make a loss, and when the small hits are continuous (the second small hit fluctuation without the big hit fluctuation or the missed fluctuation after the first small hit fluctuation). (When) is not executed when the small hits are not continuous (when the next fluctuation of the small hits is a big hit or a miss), a special effect (for example, an effect to notify that the small hits are continuous) May be executed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the approach advantageous state (in this example, the open state) in which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can enter and the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter. A variable starting device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can be changed to an approach disadvantageous state (closed state in this example) and an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device. A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22) that can be changed to and is provided, and the variable starting device can be controlled by any one of a plurality of open patterns (see FIG. 15). ..
In addition, variable display can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device.
Based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a predetermined display result (small hit symbol in this example), the predetermined variable device is controlled to a predetermined state (small hit game state in this example) that changes the predetermined variable device to an approach advantageous state. It is possible, and it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased. Further, as the special state, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the second special state (high probability / second K in this example) having a different degree of advantage from the first special state.
It can be controlled to (T state). Then, the variable starting device can be controlled by the specific opening pattern at different ratios depending on whether the control is performed in the first special state or the second special state (in this example, in the first KT state). , As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for only 0.2 seconds. Open). Therefore, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when the game is controlled in the special state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 0.2 seconds in the second KT state. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened for 0.2 seconds with a low probability even in the first KT state, or the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened with a low probability even in the second KT state. It may be configured to be open for 5 seconds. At least in the case of the second KT state, the rate of short-opening the variable winning ball device 15 may be higher.

Further, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot,
It is possible to control 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot), and the second special state has a higher advantage than the first special state (in this example, the first KT state is small). While it is rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 in a winning game, a game ball can be won in a special winning opening 24 in a small hit game in the second KT state). In addition, it is possible to control the second special state according to the type of advantageous state (in this example, the high probability / second KT state is shifted to after the end of the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit). Therefore, by associating the type of the advantageous state with the type of the special state, it is possible to pay attention to which type of the advantageous state is obtained.

Further, it may be configured to execute different effects during the big hit game depending on the type of big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which effect is executed during the jackpot game.

Further, according to this embodiment, at least a part of the effects is taken over during the period controlled in the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game state) and the period controlled in the second special state. (In this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the sound output of the music for the second KT is continued until the end of the second KT state. ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by giving the player a stronger impression that the player is controlled in the second special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the sound output of the music is inherited from the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggers the second KT state to the subsequent second KT state is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the moving image may be inherited and displayed, the round number display may be inherited and displayed, or the prize ball number display may be inherited and displayed.

Further, according to this embodiment, a specific variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 20) provided on the upstream side of the variable starting device and capable of changing between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state is provided.
It is possible to control the specific variable device to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) that changes the approach advantageous state. Further, it is determined whether or not the variable starting device is controlled to the approach advantageous state (in this example, whether or not it is a hit in the normal drawing), and the variable starting device is controlled to the approach advantageous state at the same ratio regardless of the state. Whether or not it is determined (in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26C), whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state). Regardless of which one it is, and whether or not it is in the big hit game state, it is determined with the same probability whether or not it is a normal figure hit). Therefore, the entry of the game medium into the specific variable device can be prevented from being affected by the variable starting device that can control the approach advantageous state even during the advantageous state, so that the digestion period of the advantageous state can be shortened. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (probability change state in this example) after controlling to an advantageous state, which is the same as the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example). It is possible to control to the third special state (low probability / first KT state in this example) in which the open pattern is selected by the ratio and the variable starter is controlled and the variable display pattern is selected by a different ratio and the variable display is executed. Is. Then, when it is controlled to the advantageous state and then not controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the third special state (in this example, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit is completed, the probability is low / the first KT. Transition to state). Therefore, when it is controlled to the advantageous state and then not controlled to the special state, it is possible to give an opportunity to discourage the player from ending the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable starting device and the predetermined variable device are provided with delay means (regulation piece 118 in this example) for delaying the flow of the game medium. for that reason,
By providing the delay means, the flow speed of the game medium is delayed, the rate of entry of the game medium into the variable starting device can be further increased in the first special state, and the predetermined variable device in the second special state. The entry rate of the game medium can be further increased.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example). With
While the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is being executed, the other variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be executed (in this example, the variation of the first special symbol). The display and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). In addition, a predetermined state (in this example,
It is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state), and it is also possible to determine the variable display time (variable time in this example). 1 It is possible to determine that the identification information is controlled to a predetermined state at a higher rate than when the variable display of the identification information is executed (in this example, a small hit is made only when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Can be determined). Then, when the control is performed in the special state, a shorter time can be determined as the variable display time of the variable display of the second identification information as compared with the case where the control is performed in the non-special state (in this example). As shown in FIGS. 13 (C), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, whereas as shown in FIGS. 13 (D) to 14 (I). , In the KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds to 2 minutes and 20 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the game machine controlled to the special state.

In this embodiment, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may not be executed at the same time. In this case, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order of winning the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. It may be configured to preferentially execute the variable display of any of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol). In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol may be out of order. , It is desirable not to be too gambling than necessary.

Further, according to this embodiment, a predetermined area (in this example, the operating gate 17) through which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can pass is provided, and the player is in an advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state). It is controllable. Then, after the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area. Therefore, when the player takes a break from the game after the end of the special state, it is possible to limit the control to the advantageous state from progressing during the break of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes, so that the probability is low.
When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed immediately after the end of the first KT state and the player takes a break due to the variation display for a long time, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Even if it becomes a big hit, it is possible to limit the progress of the big hit game during the break, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the profit of the player is impaired.

In this embodiment, the case where the operating gate 17 is provided separately from the gate 32 is shown, but the gate 32 and the operating gate 17 may be configured as a common gate.

Further, it is not always necessary to provide the operation gate 17, and when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed,
It may be configured to shift to the big hit game as it is after the symbol confirmation display time elapses.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state. Further, when the specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the advantageous state signal can be output externally. Therefore, it is possible to notify the game clerk that the unmanned game machine without a player has become advantageous, and it is possible to promote the initialization of the game machine.

The external output of the advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) is not always indispensable, and the advantageous state signal may be configured not to be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (in this example, the big hit symbol), the game medium is set in the first area (in this example, the big winning opening). It is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) in which the (game ball in this example) can enter, and the display result of the variable display becomes the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol). Based on this, it is possible to control a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) in which the game medium can enter the second region (in this example, the special winning opening 24). It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased, and as special states, a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the first It is possible to control the second special state (in this example, the high probability / the second KT state), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. Then, a special signal (in this example, a special winning opening winning signal) can be externally output in response to the entry of the game medium into the second region. Therefore, the state of entry of the game medium into the second region can be notified to the outside, and the game machine can be appropriately managed outside the game machine.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 32, when the jackpot signal 1 is not output, the prize ball rate (
If the number of prize balls obtained per 100 shots of game balls, BA) is BA> 100, there is a possibility that the act of illegally obtaining prize balls was performed even though the game was not a big hit. The hall management computer can determine that there is an abnormality. However, even in such a case, if the big hit signal 2 is output and the special winning opening winning signal is output, a prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game in the KT state. , BA> 100
Even if it is, it is possible to prevent it from being judged as abnormal and manage it from the outside of the game machine appropriately.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output a special signal common to the case where the first special state is controlled and the case where the second special state is controlled (in this example, FIG. 32). As shown in, a common special winning opening winning signal is output externally regardless of whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the external output processing on the game machine side.

As a modification shown in FIG. 33, as special signals, a first special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal 1) and a second special signal different from the first special signal (in this example). , Special winning opening winning signal 2) can be output externally, the first special signal can be output externally when controlled to the first special state, and the second special signal can be output when controlled to the second special state. 2 The special signal can be output externally (as shown in FIG. 33, the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output externally during the first KT state, and the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output externally during the second KT state). It may be configured as. With such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately managed outside the gaming machine.

For example, in the modified example shown in FIG. 33, the jackpot signal 1 is not output and the jackpot signal 2 is not output.
Is output, if the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output, it is calculated as the winning ball rate (BA1) in the first KT state, and if the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output, it is in the second KT state. It may be calculated as the prize ball rate (BA2) in the middle. Then, in the second KT state, a corresponding prize ball may be obtained in the small hit game. Therefore, even if BA2> 100, it is not judged as abnormal, and the prize ball is likely to be a small hit in the first KT state. Is rarely obtained. Therefore, if BA1> 100, it may be determined as abnormal. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate management from the outside of the game machine.

Further, for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, even though the jackpot signal 2 is not output (that is, even though it is not in the KT state), the special winning opening winning signal (that is, even though it is not in the KT state)
Even when the special winning opening winning signal 1 and the special winning opening winning signal 2) are output, it may be determined to be abnormal and notified to the game clerk or the like. Further, even when the output frequency of the special winning opening winning signal is abnormally high, it may be determined to be abnormal and notified to the game clerk or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, since the number of terminals provided on the external output terminal slope is limited (10 terminals in this example), the special winning opening 24 is awarded a prize. It is configured so that only the special winning opening winning signal indicating that it has been detected can be output, and the external output signal is not particularly output when the winning to the large winning opening is detected. Even with such a configuration, the abnormal state of the game machine 1 can be detected to some extent by notifying an external device such as a hall management computer of the winning status of the special winning opening 24.

The external output of the special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal) is not always indispensable, and the special signal may be configured not to be output externally.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable display display result is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state in this example) based on the predetermined display result (small hit symbol in this example). It is possible to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state), and to control to a special state (in this example, a KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. Game medium in special conditions (
In this example, a specific area (in this example, a special winning opening 24) through which a game ball) can enter is provided, and as special states, a first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the said It is possible to control the second special state (in this example, the high probability / the second KT state), which has a higher advantage than the first special state. Further, in the second special state, the entry effect (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a) can be executed based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area. Therefore, when the game medium enters the specific area in the first special state, the entry effect is not executed (in this example, even if the game ball wins in the special winning opening 24 when it is not in the second KT state, the prize ball The addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are not executed). Therefore, by preventing the entry effect from being executed depending on the entry of the irregular game medium in the first special state (in this example, the special winning opening 24 is rarely won in the first KT state), the game state is set. In addition to being able to achieve consistency in the production of the above, it is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect when controlling to a special state.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state), and the advantageous states are the first advantageous state (in this example, the 6R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot) and the first. It can be controlled to 2 advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot). Further, it is possible to control to the first special state after being controlled to the first advantageous state, and to be controlled to the second special state after being controlled to the second advantageous state (in this example, 6R probability variation jackpot or 2R). After the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability / 1st KT state, and after the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability / second KT state), from the period controlled to the second advantageous state. 2 It is possible to execute a special effect (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT) over a period controlled by the special state. Therefore, the effect of the effect in the second special state can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the approach effect, an addition effect corresponding to the addition of the game value (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display) and an effect by sound output corresponding to the entry of the game medium. (In this example, the output of the winning sound) and the effect of emitting light from the light emitting body (in this example, the lighting display of the special winning port lamp 24a) are executed. for that reason,
It is possible to emphasize the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the second special state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the approach effect (in this example, the display of the prize ball addition display, the output of the prize sound, the special prize opening lamp 2
Execution of the lighting display of 4a) and the special effect (in this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT) are not necessarily required, and one or both of these effects are not executed. May be good.

In this embodiment, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the first
Shows the case where the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the variable display of the second decorative symbol, and the variable display of the background symbol are executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable display of the small symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the small symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be feasible. May be good. In this case, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be configured to be displayed in the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), or may be configured by a lamp or LED other than the effect display device 9. May be good.

[Modification example]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the above-described embodiment will be described. In this modification, an example of a display screen (screen layout) displayed on the effect display device 9 mainly in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and the KT state (particularly low probability / first KT state), and An example of display control of the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state will be described. In the following, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is referred to as the first hold display, and the second hold display.
The hold display corresponding to the hold storage may be referred to as the second hold display.

The details will be clarified by the following description, but in this modified example, unlike the above-described embodiment, the effect display device 9 has a background symbol (first background shown in FIG. 63) according to the variable display of the special symbol. The symbol display unit 91a and the background symbol displayed on the second background symbol display unit 92a are displayed in a variable manner, and the small symbols smaller than the background symbol (first small symbol display unit 91b and second small symbol display shown in FIG. 63) are displayed in a variable manner. The small symbol displayed in the unit 92b) is displayed in a variable manner, and the first hold display (first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 shown in FIG. 63) or the second hold display (FIG. The second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 shown in 63) is displayed (that is, the first and second hold displays are not displayed in total as in the above embodiment), depending on the gaming state. , 1st
The specific display (first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a shown in FIG. 63) or the second specific display (second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a shown in FIG. 63) is displayed, and the first reserved storage number is displayed. (1st hold storage number display 71 shown in FIG. 63) corresponding to is displayed. Further, in this modification, a part different from the above-described embodiment will be mainly described, and the other parts will be described as having the same configuration and processing as the above-described embodiment unless otherwise specified. Omit.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process (step S707) in the modified example. In this hold storage display control process, the display control of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number displayed on the effect display device 9 is performed.

In the hold storage display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received (step S7071). Whether or not the first effective start winning command has been received depends on whether or not a flag corresponding to the type of the received command (effect control command) is set in the process of step S670 shown in FIG. 45, for example. It is recognizable.

When the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command (step S7).
In Y) of 071, the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number is updated (step S707).
2). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 adds 1 to the 1st hold storage number when it receives the 1st effective start winning command, and 1 when it receives the 1st variation pattern command.
Subtract and store the first hold storage number in, for example, the first hold number storage buffer. Therefore,
When the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command, the effect control CPU 201 updates and displays the hold number display (first hold storage number display 71) indicating the first hold storage number added by 1. In addition, when the effect control CPU 201 starts the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first hold storage (
(When the first fluctuation pattern command is received), the hold number display (first hold storage number display 71) indicating the first hold storage number subtracted by 1 is updated and displayed.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S7).
073), if it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S7073), the process is terminated, and if it is in the non-KT state (Y in step S7073), the hold notice determination process is executed (S).
7074). Whether or not it is in the non-KT state (or KT state) is determined by, for example, FIG. 44.
It can be recognized by the type of the background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in the above.

In the hold notice determination process of step S7074, the display mode of the first hold display is any of a plurality of special modes (for example, “blue”, “green”, “red”) different from the normal mode (for example, “white”). Decide whether to give a hold notice to change to, and if so, to what special mode and how to change (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, when the effect control CPU 201 receives the first effective start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, it also receives the first winning determination result command. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 has a big hit determination random number (random number 1) and a big hit, which are extracted based on a valid start winning prize and stored in the first hold storage buffer in the first start port switch passing process. Based on the type judgment random number (random 2) and the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 5), it is judged whether or not it is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern is judged. Send a command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 determines the hold notice based on the first winning determination result command received together with the first valid start winning command. For example, in the effect control CPU 201, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command is
In the case of a jackpot fluctuation pattern, it is decided to change to a special mode (for example, "red") suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 2
01 determines that when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command is an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern is not changed to the special mode (leaves the normal mode) at a high rate. Not limited to this, for example, in the effect control CPU 201, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the first winning determination result command has a high expectation of a big hit (that is, it is easy to be selected at the time of a big hit, and it is selected at the time of a loss. When it is a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to do), it is decided to change it to a special mode (for example, "red") suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate, and the first
When the fluctuation pattern indicated by the winning judgment result command has a low expectation of a big hit (that is, a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to be selected at the time of a big hit and is easy to be selected at the time of a miss).
A high percentage may be determined in a normal mode that does not suggest a jackpot expectation. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the first hold display to a special mode at the time of starting prize (that is, when receiving the first valid start winning command), another timing (for example, the first hold display is shifted and displayed). It may be decided to change the command at a certain timing or a predetermined timing during the variable display of the special symbol). Further, in the hold notice determination process, the first specific display (first specific), which will be described later, is displayed when the first hold display is deleted and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold display is started. The display mode of the first specific display) on the display unit 61a may be determined in advance.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 increases the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7074 (step S7075).

On the other hand, when the first effective start winning command has not been received (N in step S7071), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second effective start winning command has been received (step S7076). When the effect control CPU 201 receives the second effective start winning command (Y in step S7076), it determines whether or not it is in the KT state (step S).
7077) If the second valid start winning command has not been received (N in step S7076)
), The process proceeds to step S7083.

When the effect control CPU 201 is not in the KT state (N in step S7077),
When the process is completed and the state is in the KT state (Y in step S7077), it is determined whether or not the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S7078). Here, the chance time is a special symbol of 1 after a big hit game based on a 6R normal big hit or a 2R normal big hit.
It refers to the low probability / first KT state that is controlled until it is changed 00 times (that is, up to 100 rotations after the big hit game is completed). The remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the chance time is, for example, the fluctuation after the effect control CPU 201 receives the low accuracy / first KT background designation command for the first time by the process of step S633 shown in FIG. 44 after the jackpot game ends. It can be recognized by storing the number of times and subtracting it from the specified number of times (100 times) of the chance time.

If the remaining 9 fluctuations or less (N in step S7078) until the end of the chance time,
The effect control CPU 201 executes the hold notice determination process (step S7079). The hold notice determination process in step S7079 is the same as the hold notice decision process described in the process of step S7074, and can be explained by replacing "first" in the hold notice decision process in step S7074 with "second". .. After that, the effect control CPU 201 increases the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7079 (step S7080).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S7088), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S7081). When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S)
At Y) of 7081, the effect control CPU 201 ends the process. At this time, if there is a second hold display that has already been displayed, the effect control CPU 201 may control all the second hold displays to be hidden. If the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (that is, the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; N in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 normally performs the second hold on the second hold display unit 62. Increase the display by 1 (
Step S7082).

When neither the first effective start winning command nor the second starting winning command is received, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined state change has occurred (step S7083).
.. Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state as a predetermined state change based on the background designation command and the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560. It is determined whether or not there has been a change from the KT state to the non-KT state. When there is no predetermined state change (N in step S7083),
When the effect control CPU 201 ends the process and there is a predetermined state change (step S7).
In Y) of 083, the displayed first hold display or second hold display is hidden according to the state change (step S7084). Specifically, when the game state changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 hides the first hold display, and the game state changes from the KT state (to be exact, the first KT state) to the non-KT state. When the state changes, the second hold display is hidden. If the effect control CPU 201 has a second hold memory when the game state changes from the jackpot game state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 displays the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory. , The gaming state is from KT state (to be exact, 1st KT state) to non-KT
If the first hold memory is held when the state is changed, the first hold display corresponding to the first hold memory is displayed.

Here, characteristic points in the above-mentioned hold storage display control process will be described below.

When the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the hold number display update (step S7072) is executed, whereas when the second valid start winning command is received (step S7076). In Y), the hold number display update is not executed. From this, it can be seen that the hold number corresponding to the first hold storage number is updated and displayed, while the hold number corresponding to the second hold storage number is not displayed. Further, the number of holds corresponding to the number of first hold storage is updated and displayed regardless of the gaming state (whether it is in the KT state or the non-KT state), whereas the number of hold corresponding to the second number of hold storage is displayed. It can also be seen that is not displayed regardless of the game status.

Further, when the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the first hold display is not increased (N in step S7073) unless it is in the non-KT state (step S).
When the second valid start winning command is received when the process of 7075 is not executed (step S).
In Y) of 7076, the second hold display is not increased unless it is in the KT state (N in step S7077) (the processing of steps S7080 and S7082 is not executed). Further, when the state shifts to the KT state after the big hit, the first hold display is hidden, and when the state shifts from the KT state to the non-KT state, the second hold display is hidden (steps S7083 and S7084). For this reason, the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state and is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second hold display is not displayed in the non-KT state and is displayed in the KT state. You can see that.

Further, when the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7076), the hold notice is not executed if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less (step S7).
S7079 is not executed by Y of 078). Further, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second hold display is not increased (S708 by Y in step S7081).
2 is not executed). From this, in the second hold display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 9 to 6 times, the execution of the hold notice is restricted (displayed in the normal mode), and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5. It can be seen that when the number of times is less than the number of times, the execution of the hold notice is restricted and the addition of the second hold display is restricted (hidden) even in the KT state. in this way,
Regarding the second hold display, different display controls are performed according to the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time even in the same gaming state, and the reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the background symbol change start processing (step S901) in the modified example. In this background symbol variation start process, the same reference reference numerals are given to the same processes as those described with reference to FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 executes the specific display control process (step S920A). Here, the specific display control process will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a specific display control process (step S920A) in the modified example. In this specific display control process, the first specific display (first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a shown in FIG. 63) and the second specific display (second specific display shown in FIG. 63) displayed on the effect display device 9 are displayed. The second specific display in the unit 62a) and the display control of the shielding effect are performed.
Here, the first specific display is different from the first hold display unit 61 from the start to the end of the variation display corresponding to the variation display during the variation display of the first special symbol. 1 It is displayed on the specific display unit 61a, and is a display for specifying the execution of the variable display. Further, the second specific display is different from the second hold display unit 62 from the start to the end of the variation display corresponding to the variation display during the variation display of the second special symbol. Displayed on the specific display unit 62a,
It is a display for specifying the execution of the variable display. Further, the first specific display (or the second specific display) has the same shape and size as the first hold display (or the second hold display) displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (or the second hold display unit 62). It is displayed by. However, the first specific display and the first
The hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) may have different shapes, different sizes, or may be displayed in completely different modes. For example, the first specific display and the first
It is desirable that the hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) be displayed in a manner in which a part of the shape and color is similar. Further, the shielding effect refers to an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display from being difficult to see.

In the specific display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (that is, the variation pattern command for the first special symbol) (step S9301). In the case of the first fluctuation pattern (Y in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S9302), and when it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S9302). In the case of the non-KT state (Y in step S9302), the specific notice determination process is executed (S9303). Whether or not it is in the non-KT state (or KT state) is determined.
For example, it can be recognized by the type of background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG.

In the specific notice determination process of step S9303, the display mode of the first specific display is any of a plurality of special modes (for example, "blue", "green", "red") different from the normal mode (for example, "white"). It is decided whether to give a specific notice to change the color, and if so, to what special mode and how to change it (that is, the content of the change). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 determines the specific advance notice based on the received first fluctuation pattern command. For example, a CPU for effect control
201 determines that when the first fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, it is changed to a special mode (for example, "red") suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high at a high rate.
Further, for example, when the first fluctuation pattern is an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 201 determines that the first fluctuation pattern is not changed to the special mode (leaves the normal mode) at a high rate. Not limited to this, for example, in the effect control CPU 201, the first fluctuation pattern has a high expectation of a big hit (that is, a fluctuation pattern that is easy to be selected at the time of a big hit and difficult to be selected at the time of a miss). Occasionally, at a high rate, it is decided to change to a special mode (eg, "red") that suggests a high jackpot expectation, and the first variation pattern is one with a low jackpot expectation (ie, a jackpot). When it is a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to be selected and is easy to be selected at the time of deviation), it may be determined in a normal mode that does not suggest a jackpot expectation at a high rate. Further, the display mode of the first specific display is not changed to a special mode at the start of fluctuation (that is, when the first fluctuation pattern command is received), but at another timing (for example, when the first fluctuation pattern command is received).
It may be decided to change at a predetermined timing during the variation display of the special symbol). Further, in the above-mentioned hold notice determination process (step S7074), if the display mode of the first specific display is determined in advance at the time of starting winning (that is, based on the look-ahead), the first specific display is determined based on the look-ahead. 1 The display mode of the first specific display in the specific notice determination process may be determined based on the display mode of the specific display. Specifically, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined to be "green" based on look-ahead, a special mode suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of "green" (for example,). While it is possible to determine (“red”), it is prohibited to determine in a mode that suggests that the jackpot expectation is lower than “green” (for example, “green”) (that is, it is prohibited to lower the jackpot expectation. It may be). Further, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined based on the look-ahead, the first specific display mode is displayed in the display mode determined based on the look-ahead, and in the specific notice determination process. The display mode may not be determined.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the first specific display in the first specific display unit 61a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9303.
Step S9304).

On the other hand, when it is not the first fluctuation pattern (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 is KT.
It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step S9305), and when it is not in the KT state (step S).
In N) of 9305, the process is completed, and in the case of the KT state (Y in step S7077), it is determined whether or not the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S9306).
).

If the remaining 9 fluctuations or less are not less than the end of the chance time (N in step S9306),
The effect control CPU 201 executes the specific advance notice determination process (step S9307). The specific notice determination process in step S9307 is the same as the specific notice determination process described in the process in step S9303, and can be explained by replacing "first" in the specific notice determination process in step S9303 with "second". .. After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9307 (step S9308).

When the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9306), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (step S9309). If the remaining fluctuation is not less than 5 until the end of the chance time (that is,
In the case of the remaining 9 fluctuations to 6 fluctuations; in N) of step S9309, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a in the normal mode (step S).
9310).

When the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time (Y in step S9309), the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the shielding effect (step S9311). here,
The shielding effect is an effect that makes it difficult to see the second hold display and the second specific display. For example, the transparency of the screen displayed on the layer in front of the second hold display or the second specific display is a chance. This is a blackout effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display by gradually lowering the number of times remaining until the end of the time. The background symbol on the second background symbol display unit 92a, the small symbol on the second small symbol display unit 92b, and the first reserved storage number display 71 are displayed in a layer in front of the blackout effect. Even if the blackout effect is executed, it should be visible.

Although not described in the specific display control process described above, during the chance time, the display setting of the remaining number display 81 (see FIG. 63) indicating the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot game is controlled to the low probability / first KT state (that is, the chance time is entered), the initial number of times (low probability / first KT state) is controlled as the number of times indicated by the remaining number display 81. The remaining number display 81 is controlled to the low probability / first KT state by displaying and setting the number of times that the special symbol is deducted by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is started. Indicates the number of remaining times (of chance time).

Here, characteristic points in the above-mentioned specific display control process will be described below.

When the first fluctuation pattern is received (Y in step S9301), the display of the first specific display is not set (N in step S9302) unless it is in the non-KT state (step S9304).
When the second variation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the display of the second specific display is not set (N in step S9305) unless it is in the KT state (steps S9308 and S9310). Processing is not executed). From this, the first specific display is not displayed in the KT state and is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second specific display is not displayed in the non-KT state and is displayed in the KT state. You can see that.

Further, when the second fluctuation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the specific notice is not executed when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less (S9307 is not executed by Y in step S9306). Further, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second specific display is not set to be displayed (S9310 is not executed by Y in step S9309). From this, in the second specific display, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 9 to 6 times, the execution of the specific notice is restricted (displayed in the normal mode), and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5. It can be seen that when the number of times is less than or equal to the number of times, the execution of the specific notice is restricted and the display of the second specific display is restricted (hidden) even in the KT state. Thus, the second
Regarding the specific display, different display controls are performed according to the remaining number of chance times even in the same gaming state, and the reason for this will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

The description returns to FIG. 61, and in the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (step S9).
20B). In the case of the first fluctuation pattern (Y in step S920B), the effect control C
The PU201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S920C), and if it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S920C), sets the first non-display effect as the background symbol variation pattern (step S920F). ). On the other hand, in the non-KT state (step S920).
In Y) of C, the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (Y).
Step S920D), one of the first variation effects is set as the background pattern (step S920E). Here, the background symbol variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern, and the variation mode of the background symbol or the small symbol (for example, the reach symbol is temporarily stopped during the fluctuation, or the pseudo-ream symbol suggesting the pseudo-ream is temporarily stopped. It is an effect pattern that defines (variable modes such as letting). The first variation effect is set according to the first variation pattern, and the first background symbol display unit 91.
It is a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation mode of the background symbol in a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b, and the first non-display effect is set according to the first variation pattern and displays the first background symbol. This is an effect pattern in which the background symbol in the unit 91a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b are not variablely displayed (hidden).

On the other hand, when it is not the first fluctuation pattern (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S920B), the effect control CPU 201 is KT.
It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step S920G), and when it is not in the KT state (step S).
In N) of 920G, a second non-display effect is set as a background symbol variation pattern (step S920J). On the other hand, in the KT state (Y in step S920G), the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920H), and uses one of the second variable effects as the background symbol pattern. Set (step S920I). Here, the second variation effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation mode of the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b. The second non-display effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b are not variablely displayed (non-display). It is a production pattern.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 uses the set background symbol variation pattern (step S9).
See 20E, S920F, S920I, 920J) and the set specific display (step S).
See 9304, S9308, S9310) and the set shielding effect (step S9311).
(See) and so on (see step S920K). As a result, by the subsequent processing, various effects of the set contents are output from the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) along with the variable display of the special symbol.

Here, characteristic points in the background symbol change start processing described above will be described below.

When the first variation pattern is received (Y in step S920B), the first non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern unless it is in the non-KT state (N in step S920C), so that the first background symbol is set. The background symbol is not displayed on the display unit 91a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b (step S920F). On the other hand, when the second fluctuation pattern is received (N in step S920B), it is not in the KT state (step S).
By setting the second non-display effect as the N) background symbol variation pattern of 920G, the background symbol is not displayed on the second background symbol display unit 92a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b (N). Step S920F). From this, in the non-KT state (normal state), when the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variablely displayed according to the variable display, but the second special symbol is variablely displayed. Even if it is performed, it can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed according to the variable display. Further, in the KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variablely displayed according to the variation display, but even if the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation is displayed. It can be seen that the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed depending on the display.

Further, the background symbol and the small symbol are not variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of different special symbols (for example, the background symbol corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small symbol is the first. 2
It is not displayed separately in response to the variable display of special symbols). For this reason, the background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with each other to realize a natural effect, and the target of the variable display of the small symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) depends on the game state. It turns out that it is identified.

[Screen layout]
Next, the screen layout (display screen) in the effect display device 9 displayed by the processing shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 63. Figure 6
3 (1) shows an example of the screen layout in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), and FIG. 63 (2) shows an example of the screen layout in the chance time (low probability / first KT state).

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has the first hold display unit 61 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, the first hold display unit 61 has a maximum number of first hold storages (1st hold storage number).
Here, the number of first hold displays corresponding to 4) are arranged on the left and right. Further, the first specific display is displayed on the first specific display unit 61a provided adjacent to the right side of the first hold display unit 61 at the lower center of the display screen. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the started variation display among the first hold displays displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (1). The rightmost hold display) is erased and shifted (moved) to the first specific display unit 61a to be displayed as the first specific display, and the remaining first hold display is shifted to the right one by one (hold display). Will be moved). The first hold display unit 61 and the first specific display unit 61a may be arranged at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the first hold display and the first specific display may be shifted. Instead, the display may be erased once and then redisplayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number of holds corresponding to the first number of holds stored in the left center portion of the display screen. 1
The hold storage number display 71 is displayed. In addition, as a mode of the 1st hold storage number display, the number itself indicating the 1st hold storage number may be used, or the display lamp of the number corresponding to the 1st hold storage number is lit and displayed. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a variation of the first special symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a in the central portion of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variablely displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b at the upper right of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time (low probability / first KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) has a second hold display unit 62 at the lower left of the display screen. The hold display is displayed. Specifically, in the second hold display unit 62, a number of second hold displays corresponding to the maximum number of second hold storages (4 in this case) are arranged on the left and right. Further, the second specific display unit 62a provided at the lower center of the display screen and adjacent to the right side of the second hold display unit 62.
The second specific display is displayed at. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the start variation display among the second hold displays displayed on the second hold display unit 62 (1). (Holding display on the right side) is erased and the second specific display unit 6
It is shifted (moved) to 2a and displayed as the second specific display, and the remaining second hold display is shifted (moved) one by one to the right. The second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a may be arranged at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the second hold display and the second specific display may be shifted. Instead, the display may be erased once and then redisplayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), even in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number of holds corresponding to the first number of holds stored in the left center portion of the display screen. 1 Hold storage number display 71 is displayed. On the other hand, the hold number display corresponding to the second hold storage number is not displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) changes the second special symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a in the center of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is displayed in a variable manner, and the second small symbol display unit 9 in the upper right part of the display screen is displayed.
In 2b, the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is variablely displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time in the lower right corner of the display screen.
1 is displayed, a display indicating that the chance time is currently in progress (for example, a character display such as "during chance time") is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a chance time is in progress (KT state) at the top of the display screen. In (middle), a right-handed display is performed to instruct the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed) aimed at the right side of the game area 7.

Here, although not shown, the screen layout in the high probability / first KT state and the high probability / second KT state will be briefly described. In the high probability / first KT state, the same screen layout as in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining number of times is displayed 81.
Is not displayed and a display indicating that it is in the high probability / first KT state in the upper left corner of the display screen (
For example, the difference is that characters such as "during normal rush" are displayed). High probability / second
In the KT state, the screen layout similar to that in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining number display 81 is not displayed and the high probability / first in the upper left corner of the display screen. 2
The difference is that a display indicating that the user is in the KT state (for example, a character display such as "during special rush") is performed.

As described above, in the normal state, the effect display device 9 can display the first hold display and the first specific display, and the background symbol corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol. And small symbols are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, in the normal state, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed on the effect display device 9, and even if the second special symbol is variablely displayed, the background corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. No symbols or small symbols are displayed. Further, during the chance time (or KT state), the effect display device 9 can display the second hold display and the second specific display, and corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. The background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, during the chance time (or KT state), the first hold display and the first specific display are not displayed on the effect display device 9, and even if the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the first special symbol is displayed. Background symbols and small symbols corresponding to the variable display are not displayed. As described above, in the normal state, the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable manner, and the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed. Therefore, the variable time in the normal state is not displayed. Even if the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for a very long time (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes), the degree of recognition of the player for the variation display of the second special symbol can be reduced, which is appropriate. It is possible to perform production control. Further, in the KT state such as during the chance time, as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time is shorter than that in the normal state, the frequency of small hits per unit time is increased, so that the player is small. Pay attention to the variable display of the second special symbol that triggers the hit. Therefore, in the KT state, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed.
By not performing the first hold display or the first specific display, the recognition degree of the variable display of the first special symbol can be lowered, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be paid more attention.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and during the chance time ( Alternatively, in the KT state), the small symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the background symbol on the first background symbol display unit 91a in the normal state and the second background symbol during the chance time (or KT state).
Even if the variable display of the background symbol on the background symbol display unit 92a is hidden (or difficult to see) due to a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect), the player can check the small symbol to play the game. It is possible to recognize an appropriate variable display of a special symbol according to the state.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the display indicating the number of the second reserved storage is not displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reasons. That is, even though the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state, there is a risk that the effect will be inconsistent if the display indicating the number of second hold storages is displayed. Further, during the chance time, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the display of the second hold display is restricted (shielded by the shielding effect or controlled to be hidden). ). Therefore, for example, even though the display of the second hold display is restricted during the chance time, if the number of the second hold memories is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect may be inconsistent. Therefore, during the chance time, the second from the beginning
By not displaying the number of pending memories, the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less,
Even when the display of the second hold display is restricted, a natural effect is realized.
For the above reasons, it is assumed that the number of second reserved memories is not displayed regardless of the game state, but for example, the KT state different from the chance time (the state where the KT state is guaranteed until the next big hit). Then, since the second hold display is not limited, the number of second hold storages may be displayed.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the first reserved memory number display 71 showing the number of the first reserved memory is displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reasons. That is,
In the non-KT state (normal state), the display of the first hold display is not restricted. Therefore, in the normal state, the player's recognizability is ensured by displaying the first hold storage number display 71. Also,
Even in the KT state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not long (for example, 10 seconds or less), so K
Even if the first reserved memory remains when the T state is started, it is immediately digested, and in the KT state, a right-handed strike is performed, so that a new first reserved memory is rarely generated. Therefore, even if the first reserved storage number display 71 is displayed in the KT state, the number is "0".
In most cases, it does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Further, rather, by making the player recognize that the first reserved memory number display 71 indicates "0", it is made to recognize that it is a right-handed game (that is, a game in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed). , It becomes possible to concentrate more on right-handed games. For the above reasons, the first reserved storage number display 71 is supposed to be displayed regardless of the game state, but it may be hidden in the KT state.

In the normal state, the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and in the KT state such as during the chance time, the variable display of the first special symbol is supported. The fourth symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the variable display of the fourth symbol is a predetermined display in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and smaller than the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b. This is achieved by continuing to turn on and off the color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. The area in which the fourth symbol is variablely displayed (fourth symbol display area) may be an area different from the display screen of the effect display device 9, and for example, a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED may be used to display the fourth symbol. 4 The symbol display area may be realized. In this way, by performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is not displayed in the normal state, or the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the KT state. Even when the corresponding background symbol or small symbol is not displayed, the fluctuation state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be confirmed by the fourth symbol. Further, since the fourth symbol has lower visibility than the background symbol and the small symbol, the player can reduce the degree of recognition of the variation display of the second special symbol to the player under the normal state, and the KT. In the state, the player can reduce the degree of recognition of the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, a hold display lamp (not shown) corresponding to the first hold display and the second hold display may be provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, and the hold display lamp may be lit and displayed regardless of the gaming state. .. The display control of the hold display lamp may be controlled by the game control microcomputer 560, or may be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 200. Further, the hold indicator lamps whose display is controlled by both of them may be provided separately. By separately providing the hold display lamp in this way, even if the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state or the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state, the hold display lamp sets the first hold storage number and the second hold. You can check the number of memories. Further, since the hold display lamp is provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, the visibility is lower than that of the hold display on the first hold display unit 61 and the second hold display unit 62. On the other hand, the recognition degree of the second hold display can be lowered, and in the KT state, the recognition degree of the first hold display can be lowered for the player.

Further, in the above-described modification, the first hold display or the second hold display is displayed according to the game state, and the first specific display or the second specific display is displayed according to the game state, so that the first hold is displayed. It is assumed that the display positions of the display unit 61 and the second reserved display unit 62 are the same (lower left of the display screen), and the display positions of the first specific display unit 61a and the second specific display unit 62a are the same (lower center of the display screen). ), But these may be in different positions from each other. Similarly, in the above, it is assumed that the display positions of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a are the same (center portion of the display screen), and the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 91b. Although the display positions of 92b are the same (upper right part of the display screen), they may be different from each other. Further, for example, the first background symbol display unit 91a and the second background symbol display unit 92a (or the first small symbol display unit 91).
Even if the display position of b and the second small symbol display unit 92b) is the same, the display mode of the background symbol (or small symbol) displayed in each is different to support the variable display of the first special symbol. It may be possible to distinguish between the ones to be used and the ones corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the small symbols can be displayed at the respective display positions. Will be. In this case, in the normal state, the small symbol may be variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in this case,
It is preferable that the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b has lower visibility than the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b. Similarly, in the KT state such as during the chance time, the small symbol may be variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbol in the first small symbol display unit 91b has lower visibility than the small symbol in the second small symbol display unit 92b.

[Example of display control such as second hold display during chance time]
Next, an example of display control of the second hold display and the second specific display during the chance time displayed by the processing of the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 64.

FIG. 64 (1) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 10 times or more during the chance time. FIG. 64 (1
), At this time, the second hold display unit 62 displays the second hold display and the second specific display unit 62a displays the second specific display. In addition, since the hold notice and the specific notice can be executed, the second hold notice can be changed to a special mode, and the hold notice can be changed to a special mode.
The specific display can also be changed to a special aspect. During the chance time, a right-handed display is performed so that the player can make a right-handed hit.

In FIG. 64 (2), the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time is 9 to 6 during the chance time.
An example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) at the time of the turn is shown. FIG. 64 (2)
), At this time, the second hold display unit 62 displays the second hold display and the second specific display unit 62a displays the second specific display. However, since the execution of the hold notice and the specific notice is prohibited, the second hold notice is displayed in the normal mode and is also displayed.
The second specific display is also displayed in the normal mode.

FIG. 64 (3) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less during the chance time. FIG. 64 (3)
As shown in the above, at this time, a shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the display areas of the second reserved display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a from being difficult to see is executed. As a result, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 becomes difficult to see, and the second specific display unit 62
The second specific display in a becomes difficult to see. In addition, this blackout effect gradually blacks out (transparency decreases) as the number of remaining times until the end of the chance time decreases.
Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display, and it is possible to impressively suggest that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is reduced.

By the way, as can be seen from the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the additional display and the second specific display of the second hold display are controlled to be hidden. Therefore, even if the shielding effect (blackout effect) is not executed, the additional display of the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 is difficult to see (non-display), and the second specific display unit 62a has a second display. The specific display can be made difficult to see (non-display). Further, when the shielding effect (blackout effect) is executed, the additional display and the second specific display of the second hold display are not controlled to be hidden, but are displayed and controlled in the same manner as in FIG. 64 (2). May be good. Even in this way, the second hold display and the second specific display are shielded by the blackout effect displayed on the layer on the upper surface thereof, so that the second hold display and the second specific display are blocked.
It is possible to make the specific display difficult to see and to simplify the display control flow of the second hold display and the second specific display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), since the second hold display and the second specific display are restricted to be difficult to see due to the shielding effect, the second hold display is shifted and displayed (second hold display). The effect in which is sequentially shifted to the right and the effect in which the second hold display is shifted to the second specific display) are also restricted (becomes difficult to see). Even if the shielding effect is not executed, if the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second display has already been displayed.
When there is a hold display, all the second hold displays may be controlled to be hidden, and the effect of shifting the second hold display may be limited to non-display.

Further, in the above, the second is a shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the entire screen.
It is difficult to see (or hide) because the hold display and the second specific display are blocked. For example, by changing the layout of the display screen, the second hold display and the second display can be displayed.
The specific display may be difficult to see (or hide). Here, "changing the layout of the display screen" is a concept including changing the display position and display size of various display items displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the display item is a concept. It is a concept including all displays displayed as effects on the effect display device 9, such as background symbols and hold displays. As a change in the layout of the display screen, for example, the display area of the remaining number display 81 may be expanded. Specifically, by expanding the display area of the remaining number display 81 to the left, the second hold display unit 62 in which the second hold display is displayed and the second specific display are displayed.
The display area of the specific display unit 62a may be shielded. Further, as a change in the layout of the display screen, for example, the second background symbol display unit 92a may be expanded downward to shield the second hold display and the second specific display. Further, the shielding effect is not limited to the blackout effect, and may be an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display by using another display effect or a movable body (movable effect character). .. Further, the second hold display and the second specific display are not completely shielded, and may be difficult to see due to a decrease in their visibility. For example, in the effect display device 9, the display positions of the second hold display and the second specific display are changed (for example, changed to the upper right corner), or the display size is changed (for example, reduced display). It may be the one that reduces the sex.

Further, the above-mentioned blackout effect is started on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, and the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see. However, the blackout effect is started on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is, for example, 10 times or less, and the transparency decreases as the remaining number of times decreases, and the remaining number of times is 10 times or more. At the time of 6 times, the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display can be visually recognized, while when the remaining number of times reaches 5 times, the 2nd hold display and the 2nd specific display may become difficult to see. In this way, the display control that makes the second hold display and the second specific display difficult to see can be made more comfortable. Further, the same effect can be applied when an effect other than the blackout effect is used as the shielding effect.

FIG. 64 (4) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the variation display of the final variation of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) is completed. As shown in FIG. 64 (4), when the final fluctuation of the chance time is completed, the background symbol (for example, the stop symbol indicating the loss (or small hit)) corresponding to the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (for example) "3", "9", "4") are stopped, and similarly, the small symbols (for example, "3", "9", "4") corresponding to the result of the variation display of the second special symbol are stopped. The background symbol and the small symbol may be different from each other. Then, with the end of the chance time, the right-handed display ends (becomes hidden), and instead, a left-handed notification that urges the player to left-handed is executed.
Although not shown, during the fluctuation of the final fluctuation, an end display (for example, a character display of "the end of the chance time!") Is displayed to notify that the chance time is over, and the first one is displayed. Based on the value of the prize ball counter, the prize ball number display is displayed during the consecutive villas. As a result, the end of the consecutive villas and the total number of prize balls acquired during that period (total number of prize balls won) are notified. Further, at this time, the number of big hits (number of consecutive villas) in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the chance time may also be notified.

FIG. 64 (5) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) in the normal state immediately after the chance time ends (that is, the 101st rotation after the chance time starts). As shown in FIG. 64 (5), when the gaming state is switched from the first KT state to the normal state, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display in the second specific display unit 62a are hidden. Even if it is controlled and a new second effective start winning command is generated (that is, even if a new valid start winning entry 14 is generated), the second hold display and the second
The specific display is not displayed. On the other hand, when a new first start winning command is generated by the player making a left hit based on the left-handed notification shown in FIG. 64 (4) (that is, a new effective prize is generated for the first start winning opening). The first specific display is displayed on the first specific display unit 61a, the background symbol is variablely displayed on the first background symbol display unit 91a according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first small symbol is displayed. The small symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the unit 91b. As a result, the player recognizes the start of the variation display of the 101st rotation after the end of the chance time.
When the first start winning command is newly generated during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first reserved storage number is updated, so that the first reserved storage number display 71 is updated and displayed, and the first The first hold display in the hold display unit 61 is additionally displayed.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 64, the reason why the display control of the second hold display and the second specific display differs depending on the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 63, in this modified example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is very long (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes) in the normal state (non-KT state), and the normal state. Since left-handed striking is recommended, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be hidden so as not to recognize that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, if the control is performed in the normal state after the end of the chance time, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed as described above with reference to FIG. 64 (5). Therefore, if the second hold display is displayed when the change display of the final change of the chance time (100th rotation after the start of the chance time) ends, this second hold display is displayed when the normal state is switched to. Is suddenly controlled to be hidden, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Also, for example, if there is a second hold display that has changed to a special mode at the end of the final change in chance time, this will be hidden, disappointing the player, or
Even though there is a second hold display, the effect (background pattern, etc.) is not displayed in the normal state, which may cause inconsistency in the effect. However, as described above, in this modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed before the final fluctuation of the chance time ends (that is, after the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5 times). Since the display is controlled so that it is difficult to see, the degree of recognition of the player for the second hold display and the second specific display is lowered, and the second hold display and the second specific display are hidden when the normal gaming state is entered. Even if it is controlled, it can be prevented from giving a sense of discomfort. In addition, when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see, but the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are visually recognized. Since the display is controlled as much as possible, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the second special symbol is variablely displayed during the chance time.

By the way, in the above-described modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be difficult to see on condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 5 times or less, but the remaining number of times is The reason why it is required to be 5 times or less is as follows. That is, in the above-described modification, since the maximum number of second hold storages is 4, a maximum of four second hold displays can be displayed, and the second specific display is also displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, by displaying the second hold display and the second specific display, it is possible for the player to recognize information for a maximum of 5 fluctuations. Therefore, by controlling the display of the second hold display and the second specific display to be difficult to see when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5, the display was visually recognized during the chance time after the end of the chance time. It is possible to prevent the situation where the second specific display and the second hold display are hidden. The second hold display and the second specific display are displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, and the remaining number of times is more than 5 times (for example, 10 times) or less. The display may be controlled so that it is difficult to see. Further, the display control of the second hold display and the second specific display may be difficult to see until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times after the end of the chance time (after the transition to the normal state), that is, the KT state. The second hold display and the second specific display may be displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see for a period before and after the timing including the end of.

Further, in the above-described modification, the hold notice of the second hold display and the specific notice of the second specific display are restricted (not executed) on the condition that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less. However, the reason why the remaining number of times is 9 times or less is as follows. That is, as described above, when the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see. Therefore, the second hold display and the second display that are controlled to be difficult to see.
If the mode of the specific display is changed to a special mode, the display becomes difficult to see while giving the player a sense of expectation, which may impair the player's sense of expectation, or the effect of the production. Inconsistencies can occur. Therefore, by limiting the hold notice of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less, the fourth second hold display, which is the maximum number of holds, shifts as the second specific display after 4 fluctuations. It is displayed, and even if it is controlled to be difficult to see because the remaining number of times is 5 times or less, the second specific display in the normal mode is only controlled to be difficult to see. It becomes possible to avoid it. Regarding the second hold display, it is necessary to limit the hold notice of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less in consideration of the possibility that the shift display is displayed by a maximum of 4 fluctuations. However, this does not apply to the second specific display. Therefore, regarding the second specific display, the specific notice may be restricted on the condition that the remaining number of times that the display becomes difficult to see is 5 times or less. Further, without the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less, the remaining number of times is more than 9 times (for example, 20 times).
(Times) On condition that the number of times is as follows, the hold notice of the second hold display and the specific notice of the second specific display may be restricted.

By the way, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state such as the KT state in which the frequency of small hits per unit time is increased, the player remains when the KT state ends and shifts to the normal state. In order to confirm the result of whether or not to make a big hit based on the second hold memory
After the end of the KT state, the game machine may be intentionally occupied without firing the game ball. In such a case, it is not appropriate for the game store because the operation of the game machine is reduced. Further, if the player can recognize the second hold display regarding the second hold memory remaining after the end of the KT state, all of them are hidden for a long time (for example, if there are four hold of 15-minute long fluctuations). 60 minutes until it becomes) The KT state ends in an unnatural display state in which the second hold display is displayed. Furthermore, although it is not always a big hit based on the remaining second reserved memory, until the variation display based on the second reserved memory is completed and the pass / fail result is displayed (holding digestion is performed). Since it takes a certain amount of time (for example, 15 minutes), the player may miss the opportunity to finish the game, and if the player continues the game, the player may be disadvantaged. However, as described above, according to this modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed after the end of the KT state, and the second hold display is displayed during the chance time (before the end 5 change). And by controlling the second specific display to be difficult to see, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively recognizing that there is a remaining second reserved memory. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from intentionally occupying the game machine, thereby preventing a decrease in the operation of the game machine, and it is possible to realize a display without a sense of discomfort at the end of the KT state. It is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to end the game.

In the above-described modification, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed in the KT state, but the second hold display and the second specific display are not always displayed (or are not displayed regardless of the game state). It may be difficult to see). This is suitable, for example, in the case of a gaming machine having the following KT hits and non-KT hits in a predetermined ratio. Here, the KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game is completed. The non-KT hit is a big hit that can be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and is a big hit that is controlled in the normal gaming state immediately after the big hit ends. Such per KT and non-KT
In a game machine having a hit, it is conceivable to display a second hold display in order to improve the interest of the game in the KT state after winning the KT. Then, if a non-KT hit is won in such a gaming state, when the second special symbol indicating the non-KT hit is stopped (that is, when the big hit is confirmed), a right-handed hit is performed in the KT state. By, up to 4
There is a high possibility that two second hold displays are displayed. However, if a non-KT hit is won, the second hold display that was displayed before the jackpot is confirmed is controlled to be hidden by being controlled to the normal state after the jackpot game. Then, before the jackpot is confirmed, for example, the second hold display, which has changed to a special mode, is hidden, which discourages the player, or even though there is a second hold display, the effect (in the normal state). The background design, etc.) may not be displayed, which may cause inconsistency in the production. Therefore, in order to avoid such inconsistency in the effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold display related to the second hold memory stored after the second hold memory indicating the non-KT hit in the KT state. It is preferable to control the display (for example, hide). Therefore, for example, look-ahead at the time of starting prize (second prize judgment result command)
Based on the above, it is conceivable to control the display of the second hold display regarding the subsequent start prize (second hold memory) so that it is difficult to see at the timing when the start prize indicating a non-KT hit occurs. However, if the display control based on such look-ahead is performed, it is confirmed in advance that it is a big hit, so that there is a risk of reducing the interest of the game. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a non-KT hit, the second hold display may not always be displayed (or is difficult to see) even in the KT state (regardless of the gaming state). By doing this, K
It is possible to avoid inconsistency in the production when the game shifts to the normal game state because the second hold display is not displayed even if the non-KT hit is won without suggesting that the big hit is confirmed in advance in the T state. ..

In the above-mentioned gaming machine having a non-KT hit, for example, at the timing when the start prize indicating the non-KT hit occurs based on the look-ahead at the time of the start prize, the second start prize (second hold memory) regarding the subsequent start prize. In addition to controlling the display of the hold display so that it is difficult to see, at the timing when the start prize that shows a deviation (or small hit) at a predetermined rate occurs based on the look-ahead at the start prize, the subsequent start prize (second) The second hold display related to the hold memory) may be displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see for a predetermined period (predetermined number of fluctuations). In this way, the second hold display may be difficult to see for a predetermined period even when it is not a big hit (there is a so-called ghost), so that the big hit is not confirmed and suggested in advance in the KT state. Since the second hold display is not displayed even if the player wins the KT, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect when the game shifts to the normal game state.

Further, as described above, in the gaming machine having a KT hit and a non-KT hit, the display control that makes the second hold display difficult to see regardless of the game state, and based on the look-ahead, the non-KT hit is added. By performing display control that makes the second hold display difficult to see for a predetermined period when there is a deviation (or a small hit) at a predetermined ratio, inconsistency in the effect can be avoided. And, these display controls (hereinafter, referred to as specific display controls) are not limited to game machines having KT hits and non-KT hits.
It can also be applied to a game machine having a predetermined ratio of a KT hit and a jackpot similar to a non-KT hit (hereinafter referred to as a quasi-non-KT hit). Here, the quasi-non-KT hit is a jackpot that can be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and is from a predetermined number of times (for example, four times, which is the maximum number of the second reserved memory) after the jackpot ends. It is a big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state after controlling the KT state only a small number of times (for example, once). In a gaming machine having such a quasi-non-KT hit at a predetermined ratio, when a quasi-non-KT hit is won while being controlled in the KT state, the number of times controlled in the KT state after the big hit game is the second reserved memory number. Less than the maximum number of. Therefore, if the second hold display is displayed while being controlled in the KT state, the KT state after hitting the quasi-non-KT ends and is controlled to the normal game state, and the second hold display is hidden. When the second special symbol indicating a quasi-non-KT hit is stopped (that is, when the jackpot is confirmed), a part of a maximum of four second hold displays (remembered later) that may have been displayed. There is a risk that the second hold display) related to the hold memory will be hidden. Therefore, even in a gaming machine having a quasi-non-KT hit in place of (or in addition to) a non-KT hit at a predetermined ratio, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the effect by performing the above-mentioned specific display control.

In the above, the KT hit is a big hit that is controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game ends, but after the big hit ends, a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times, which is the maximum number of the second hold memory). It may be a jackpot controlled to the KT state more times (for example, 100 times). Even in this case, since there is a possibility of winning a non-KT hit or a quasi-non-KT hit in the KT state, the above-mentioned specific display control can be applied in the same manner.

Further, the above-mentioned modified example is applied to a game machine (so-called loop machine) that is controlled in a high probability state until the next big hit at a predetermined ratio (65%), but any big hit is won. A game machine that is controlled with a high probability until the predetermined number of fluctuation displays is completed after the big hit game (
It may be applied to a so-called ST machine). Further, in this case, when it is controlled in the high probability state, it is controlled to the KT state at the same time, and when it is controlled to the KT state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the normal state. As a result, the frequency of small hits per unit time may be increased. In this case as well, the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed and controlled so as to be difficult to see from 5 fluctuations of the final fluctuation controlled in the high probability state, and 9 of the final fluctuation is performed.
Before the change, the hold notice of the second hold display and the specific notice of the second specific display may be restricted.

In addition, when controlled in a high probability state, a lottery to decide whether to shift to a low probability state for each fluctuation (
A game machine that performs a fall lottery (so-called fall lottery type game machine) and a game machine that is controlled with a high probability in a predetermined period (ST period) until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are completed (so-called S).
In the T-type gaming machine), when it is controlled in the high probability state, it may be controlled in the second KT state, and when it is controlled in the low probability state, it may be controlled in the non-KT state.
In such a game machine, from the high probability state / second KT state to the low probability state / non-KT state (
Final fluctuation (2nd KT state) controlled by KT state (2nd KT state) when shifting to normal state)
That is, in the fall lottery type, the change in winning the fall lottery, and in the ST type, the final change in the ST period), the second hold display is controlled to be difficult to see, and the second specific display is controlled to be difficult to see. Good.

Further, in the above-described modification, as described above, even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state (non-KT state), the second hold display and the second specific display are displayed. It is not displayed, and the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are not displayed (that is, the display effect is restricted). However, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state, not only the display effect is limited, but also the second starting winning opening 14 is detected.
A notification effect (for example, a left-handed notification) that does not perform a right-handed hit aiming at winning a prize may be performed. By doing so, the degree of recognition of the player that the second special symbol is changed and displayed in response to the event of winning the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 in the normal state is lowered. , It is possible to relatively increase the degree of recognition of the player that it is an opportunity for the left-handed notification to be performed (right-handed is prohibited). Therefore, it is possible to reduce right-handed hits aimed at illegal small hits.

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), in the case of forced disconnection, in the normal state. Even if there is, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 62b, and the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b even in the KT state.
For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, but since the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation, at the same time. When the variable display of the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is forcibly removed, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating forced loss is stopped on the second small symbol display unit 92b. It may be displayed. Similarly, in the KT state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the variable display of the second special symbol. When the variable display of the first special symbol, which was displayed in a variable manner at the same time, is forcibly removed, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the forced loss is displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. It may be displayed as a stop.

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the normal state is obtained at the time of a big hit. However, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is variablely displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol, which is simultaneously variablely displayed, is a big hit variation. In some cases, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the big hit may be stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started while the variation display of the second special symbol indicating the jackpot is being performed, the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b. Later, the first normal instruction notification 56A or the second normal instruction notification 56B may be performed to positively notify that the jackpot is a big hit. Also, at this time, the first
Even if the change of the special symbol is started, the production related to the change of the first special symbol is restricted (
For example, the background symbol and the small symbol are not displayed in a variable manner according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol), and instead, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (a special effect indicating a big hit) is performed. May be. On the other hand, when the variation display (big hit variation) of the second special symbol is completed without performing the variation display of the first special symbol, the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b, and then the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed. The first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed, or the second reduction instruction notification 5
It suffices to inform that it is a big hit passively by performing 6D. In addition, it should be noted.
If the variation display of the second special symbol is an off (or small hit) variation in the normal state, the small symbol is not displayed on the second small symbol display 92b (that is, the off or small hit) as described above. In the case of, it may not be notified depending on the display effect).

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit 92b are set to different positions (particularly positions that do not overlap each other), the KT state is obtained at the time of a big hit. Alternatively, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 61b. For example, in the KT state, the small symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the second small symbol display unit 92b according to the fluctuated display of the second special symbol, but the fluctuated display of the first special symbol that is fluctuated at the same time is a jackpot fluctuation. In some cases, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating a big hit may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. In addition, K
In the T state, the player usually strikes to the right, so in most cases, the variation display of the second special symbol is started when the variation display of the first special symbol indicating the big hit is performed. is there. Then, in such a case, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed or the second normal instruction notification 5 is performed after the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b.
It suffices that it is positively notified that the jackpot is a big hit by performing 6B. Also,
At this time, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started, the effect related to the variation of the second special symbol is restricted (for example, the variation display of the background symbol or the small symbol according to the variation of the second special symbol is executed. Instead, an effect (a special effect indicating a big hit) may be performed according to the variable display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, although it is rare, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, for example, when the game ball is accidentally won in the first start winning opening 13 and the player leaves the seat when the KT state is controlled. When the variation display (big hit variation) of the first special symbol is completed, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed or the second reduction instruction notification 56C is performed after the small symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b. It may be assumed that the reduction instruction notification 56D is performed to passively notify that the jackpot is a big hit. Alternatively, in the KT state, since the player usually strikes right, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed or the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed when the game ball passes through, for example, the operating gate 17 by right strike. 2 It may be possible to positively notify that the jackpot is a big hit by performing the normal instruction notification 56B. If the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is out of alignment in the KT state, the small symbol is not displayed in the first small symbol display unit 91b as described above (that is, it is displayed in the case of out of alignment). It may not be notified depending on the production).

Further, in the above-described modification, the hold notice determination process in step S7079 did not mention the difference between the KT states (first KT state or second KT state), but whether it is the first KT state or the second KT state. The hold notice determination process may be executed accordingly. Specifically, in the hold notice determination process, the display mode of the second hold display is more likely to be changed to a special mode (that is, the hold notice is more likely to be performed) in the first KT state than in the second KT state. Good. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the first KT state of the KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 22 (that is, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball due to the small hit). On the other hand, the second K of the KT state
In the T state, a small hit is likely to occur, and a game ball is easily won in the special variable winning ball device 22 (that is, it is easy to obtain a prize ball by a small hit), so that it is easy to give a profit to the player. .. Therefore, in the second KT state, the player expects a small hit (that is, a miss), but does not expect to win a big hit that may end the second KT state (rather, do not make a big hit for a long period of time). expect). On the other hand, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball even if a small hit occurs, so he expects a big hit instead of a small hit. Therefore, in the first KT state, the hold notice is more likely to be given than in the second KT state.
In the first KT state, the expectation of the player who expects a big hit can be increased, and in the second KT state, the expectation of the player who expects a small hit can be not impaired. For the same reason, in the specific notice determination process of step S9307, the display mode of the second specific display is more likely to be changed to a special mode in the first KT state than in the second KT state (that is, the specific notice is performed). easy)
It may be a thing. In addition, as a result of displaying the variation of the second special symbol, if there is a non-small hit (normal miss) other than the big hit at a predetermined ratio, the second hold display or the second
It is also possible to give a hold notice or a specific notice that changes to a mode in which the specific display is expected to be a small hit (for example, the character display of "small").

Further, in the above-described modification, as described with reference to FIG. 60, the effect control microcomputer 200 grasps the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, and the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less. In that case, the execution of the hold notice was restricted. However, whether or not to limit the hold notice may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 counts the number of fluctuations after controlling to the low probability / first KT state after the big hit game, grasps the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time, and ends the chance time. When the remaining number of times up to 9 times or less is reached, a command for prohibiting the hold notice may be transmitted as the second winning determination result command to be transmitted when the second valid start winning is generated. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 200 that receives the second winning judgment result command gives a hold notice based on the second winning judgment result command without grasping the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time. You can decide whether to execute or prohibit. Further, it is assumed that the effect control microcomputer 200 can execute the hold notice only when a predetermined hold notice command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560 may execute the hold notice. When the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 times or less, the hold notice command may not be transmitted even if the second effective start prize is generated. Even in this way, the effect control microcomputer 200 can determine whether to execute or prohibit the hold notice based on the hold notice command without grasping the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time. Similarly, whether or not to limit the specific notice depends on the effect control microcomputer 200.
Instead, it may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560.

As described above, according to this modification, the game machine is capable of variablely displaying the identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and is the first identification. Variable display execution means (in this example, game control) capable of executing variable display of information (first special symbol in this example) and variable display of second identification information (second special symbol in this example) in parallel. A predetermined state control means (this example) capable of controlling a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit game state) which is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state, which is advantageous to the player Then, the execution time of the variable display of the second identification information is higher than that of the normal state (in this example, the non-KT state) and the normal state (the part where steps S358 to S360 are executed in the game control microcomputer 560). A state control means that can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) that is frequently controlled to a predetermined state by selecting a short fluctuation time in proportion (see FIG. 13 in this example). In the example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S22 in the game control microcomputer 560.
10B, S2213B, S2214B), a first holding storage means (in this example, a first holding storage buffer) that can store information related to the variable display of the first identification information as a first holding storage, and a second. A second that can store information related to the variable display of identification information as a second hold memory.
The hold storage means (in this example, the second hold storage buffer), the first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (in this example, the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61), and the second hold storage. Hold display means (in this example, step S7 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying the second hold display (in this example, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62) corresponding to the above.
The hold display means includes, and the hold display means displays the second hold display in a specific period (in this example, a period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time) including the timing when the special state ends. It is possible to make it difficult to see (see FIG. 64 in this example).
As a result, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display. The specific period may be a period including the timing at which the special state (KT state in this example) ends, and is not limited to the period from before the end of the special state to the end (for example, 5 fluctuations before the end). It may include a predetermined period (for example, 5 fluctuations after the end) after the end of the special state (after the transition to the normal state).

Further, according to this modification, when the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed, the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (in this example, the second specific display) is performed. A specific display means (in this example, a portion for executing steps S9308 and S9310 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying the second specific display in the unit 62a is further provided, and the specific period (in this example, the chance time) is further provided. In the period other than the period (the period in which the remaining 5 fluctuations or less until the end), the hold display means can display the second hold display and the specific display means can display the specific display, and in the specific period, the hold display means is the first. 2 It is possible to make the hold display difficult to see (in this example, step S7082 is not executed when it is Y in step S7081), and the specific display means makes the specific display difficult to see (in this example, step). S9309
It is possible that step S9310 is not executed when the value is Y. As a result, when the special state ends, it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

Further, according to this modification, the predetermining means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S65A and S65B). Part) and the specific determination means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an advantageous state is obtained based on the second reserved storage before the determination of the advance determination means) in steps S312, S215, S216. , The part that executes S322)
The hold display means changes the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage that is the judgment target of the specific judgment means to the first special mode according to the judgment result of the specific judgment means. One aspect change effect (in this example, a hold notice) can be executed, and the specific display means corresponds to the second identification information to be determined by the prior determination means according to the determination result of the prior determination means. It is possible to execute the second mode change effect (in this example, the specific notice) that changes the specific display to the second special mode, and the remaining 9 fluctuations or less until the end of the chance time for a predetermined period including the specific period (in this example, the remaining 9 fluctuations or less). In the period), the hold display means limits the execution of the first aspect change effect (in this example, step S7).
If it is Y of 078, step S7079 is not executed) and the specific display means is the second.
It was decided to limit the execution of the mode change effect (in this example, step S9307 is not executed when it is Y in step S9306). As a result, it is possible to avoid inconsistency in the production during a specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to see.

Further, according to this modification, as a special state, the state control means has a first special state (in this example, the first KT state) and a second special state (this example) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. Then,
It was decided that it could be controlled in the second KT state). As a result, the monotonousness of the game playability in the special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game when the game is controlled in the special state can be improved.

Further, according to this modified example, the effect symbol (in this example, in this example, corresponding to the variable display of the identification information).
Variable display of the first background symbol display unit 91a and the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a and the reduced symbol smaller than the effect symbol (in this example, the first small symbol display unit 91b and the second small symbol display unit). The effect control means (in this example, S920D, S920E, S920H, S92 in the effect control microcomputer 200) that can execute the variable display of the small symbol in 92b).
A part that executes 0I and S920K) is provided, and the effect control means is in a normal state (in this example, non-K).
In the T state), the variable display of the effect symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display unit 91a) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is executed, and the variable display of the second identification information is supported. The variable display of the effect symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the second background symbol display unit 92a) is not executed (in this example, step S920E is executed when Y in step S920C is executed.
In the special state (KT state in this example), the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the first identification information is executed. The variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of is not executed (in this example, step S920I is executed when it is Y in step S920G, and step S920F is executed when it is N in step S920C). A reduced symbol corresponding to variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information (in this example, the first small symbol display unit 91b or the second) depending on whether the state or the special state is controlled. It was decided to execute the variable display of the small symbol display unit 92b (in this example, either step S920D or S920H is executed depending on whether it is in the non-KT state or the KT state). As a result, it is possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol, and it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the second identification information to the variable display by the player in the normal state.

Further, according to this modification, the hold display means can display the first hold display in the normal state (non-KT state in this example), but cannot display the second hold display (this example). Then, step S7075 is executed when it is Y in step S7073, and steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed when it is N in step S7077). As a result, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the player with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory in the normal state, and it is possible to realize appropriate display control for the second hold display.

Further, according to this modification, the hold display means displays the first hold storage number corresponding to the number of the first hold storage regardless of whether it is controlled in the normal state or the special state (in this example, the hold display means). The first hold storage number display 71) is displayed, and the second hold number display corresponding to the number of the second hold storage is not displayed (in this example, step S7072 is executed when Y in step S7071 is executed, and step S7076 is performed. Even if it is Y, the process corresponding to step S7072 is not executed). As a result, the player's visibility with respect to the number of second reserved memories can be reduced while ensuring the player's recognizability with respect to the number of first reserved memories, and the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory can be reduced, respectively. Appropriate display control can be realized for the number of reserved storages.

Further, according to this modification, the game medium (in this example, the game ball) is provided on a predetermined path (in this example, the right side of the game area 7) among the flow paths in which the game medium (game ball) flows down, and the game medium can pass through. Specific area (
In this example, the operation gate 17) and the predetermined conditions (in this example, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed).
Is established, and then an advantageous state is obtained based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (in this example,
Advantageous state control means that can be controlled to the jackpot game state (in this example, in the case of Y in step S2501 in the game control microcomputer 560, steps S305 to S3
07, S355-S357 are executed) and a predetermined promotion notification (in this example, the first instruction notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions are executed. A promotion notification that can execute a specific promotion notification (second instruction notification in this example) that promotes the launch of the game medium into a specific area after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. Means (in this example, step S4404 in the effect control microcomputer 200
, S4405, S4604, and S4605). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the opportunity to control the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the production.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified example, the low probability / first KT state is set a predetermined number of times (in this example, 1).
The case where it is configured to end based on the execution of the variation display (00 times) is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the second KT state (in this example, high probability / second KT)
The state) may also be configured to end based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, for example, it may be configured to shift from the first KT state to the second KT state based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times, and conversely, the second KT may be configured based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times. It may be configured to shift from the state to the first KT state.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified example, the case where a plurality of big hit types are provided only for the big hit is shown, but the small hit may also be configured to be provided with a plurality of small hit types. In this case, for example, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 may be configured to be different depending on the small hit type, or the variable winning ball device to be released may be configured to be different depending on the small hit type. Therefore, the advantage may be different depending on the small hit type. When the variable winning ball device to be opened is configured to be different, for example, the special variable winning ball device 20 may be opened or the special variable winning ball device 22 may be opened depending on the small hit type. Alternatively, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices for small hits may be provided, and which special variable winning ball device may be opened may be configured differently depending on the small hit type.

Further, in this embodiment and the modified example, it mainly shifts to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot, and high probability / in the case of 6R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot.
The case of shifting to the first KT state and shifting to the low probability / first KT state in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot has been shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the jackpot type is the same, it may be configured so that there are both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state. In this case, for example, even if the same 6R probability variation jackpot or 6R normal jackpot is used, it may be configured so that there are both a case of shifting to the first KT state and a case of shifting to the second KT state.

In this embodiment and the modified example, it is internally configured to be controlled to the KT state, but when it is controlled to the first KT state, a small hit is likely to occur. Rarely, the special winning opening 24 is not won, and from the player's point of view, it looks as if it is controlled to a so-called high base state. Therefore, it is possible to realize the same playability as a game machine controlled to a so-called high base state, to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and to realize a plurality of types of KT states having different advantages. , The game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, "the ratio is different" means that A: B = 70%:
Not only those with different ratios such as 30% and A: B = 30%: 70%, but also A:
It is a concept that includes those having different ratios due to a relationship such as B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (effect symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. But,
The variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the effect device is controlled. The circuit to be used may be mounted on one board. Further, the effect display device 9
A first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling such as, and a second effect control board equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) Two substrates may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 is used on another substrate (for example,). , The audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 4, or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35. ) May be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35.
, A control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on a sound / lamp board, and a control related to voice control or lamp control is executed in response to a command received by the control means, and the received command can be used as it is or, for example. The command may be changed to a simplified command and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the game machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and the player operates the operation lever. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when a plurality of types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped in response to an operation of a stop button by the player. It is also possible to apply to.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the game machine using the game medium as the game machine is taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the game machine that pays out the game medium as a predetermined number of prizes. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine in which a game medium such as a game ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, the jackpot type includes a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot, and based on the determination that the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a gaming machine controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. Although shown, it is not limited to such game machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation region may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation region in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st variable display 9b 2nd variable display 9c background symbol display 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st start opening Switch 14 2nd start winning opening 14a 2nd starting opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Acting gate 17a Acting gate switch 18c Design hold memory display 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning opening 23a 1st count switch 25a 2nd count switch 31 Main board 32 Gate 56 CPU
80 Production control board 200 Production control microcomputer 201 Production control CPU
560 Game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of identification information and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, and
A predetermined state control means that is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to a predetermined state different from the advantageous state.
It is possible to control the normal state and the special state in which the variable display of the second identification information is frequently controlled to the predetermined state by selecting a shorter fluctuation time at a higher rate than the normal state. With a certain state control means
A first hold storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as a first hold storage, and
A second holding storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as a second holding storage, and
A hold display means capable of displaying a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and a second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage.
Production control means that can execute variable display of production symbols,
It is equipped with a corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display different from the above-mentioned effect symbol corresponding to the variable display during execution.
The effect control means
In the normal state, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the first identification information.
In the special state, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the second identification information.
The variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the second identification information while executing the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state.
The hold display means
In the normal state, the first hold display can be displayed, but the second hold display cannot be displayed.
In the special state, the second hold display can be displayed.
It is possible to make the second hold display difficult to see in a specific period after the specific timing before the end of the special state.
It is possible to execute a hold display change effect that changes the display modes of the first hold display and the second hold display.
In a predetermined period including the specific period, the execution of the hold display change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display is restricted.
In the normal state, the corresponding display means does not display the corresponding display in response to the variable display of the second identification information.
In the special state, a promotion display for urging the launch of the game medium toward a specific path through which the game medium can pass a specific area for satisfying the start condition for the variable display of the second identification information among the movement paths of the game medium is displayed. Can be displayed,
A game machine characterized by that.

Images